A^:i 'V-fL ^ •.4^'^: W i<»«^* Ex Libris C. K. OGDEN ' y ^ n ir-tO .- ^ THE LIBRARY OF THE UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA LOS ANGELES I/- /^^. cr^ >^/ ,yV^;3^r "• i '■'■9 " \ ■: .' ^l^ A' V v f 4 i.» •-. ; V 'H *>> AN EASY INTEODUCTION TO THE KNOWLEDGE OF THE HEBREW LANGUAGE WITHOUT THE POINTS. BY JAMES P. WILSON, D. D. Pastor of the First Presbyterian Church in the city of Philadelphia. PHILADELPHIA: PUBLISHEt) BY FARRAND, HOPKINS, ZANTZINGER, AND CO. Fry and Kammerer, Printers. 1812. District of Pennsylvani*, to wit; *********** Be it Remembered, That on the thirteenth day ot * T c * May, in the 35th year of the Independence of the United 5 J States of America, A. D. 1811, James P. Wilson, D D. of the ******«««»* said district, hath deposited in this office, the title of a book, the right whereof he claims as author, in the words following, to wit: An Easy Introduction to the Knowledge of the Hebrew Language without the points. By James P. Wilson, D. D. Pastor of the First Presbyterian Church in the City of Philadelphia. In conformity to the act of the Congress of the United States, intitled, " An act for the encouragement of learning, by securing the copies of Maps, Charts, and Books, to the authors and proprietors of such copies during the times therein mentioned." — And also to the act, entitled, " An Act supplementary to an Act, intituled, " An Act for the encouragement of learning, by securing the copies of Maps, Charts, and Books, to the authors and proprietors of such copies during the time therein mentioned," and extending the benefits thereof to the arts of designing, engraving, and etching historical and other prints." D. CALDWELL, Cleri of the District of Pennsylvania. pr i Wi PREFACE. A HE object of this book is chiefly to encourage and facilitate the progress of those, who have not the advantage of instructors. Many have attempted to learn the Hebrew, who, foiled by the labour or the difficulty attending the investigation of the roots, in a language wherein the beginnings of the words are subjected to almost as many changes as their terminations, and where the uncertainty of a third radical might disappoint them for half a dozen trials, have thrown aside their lexicons in despair. Such are solicited to make another effort. Here every word is ex- plained, as they proceed; here they will experience no such trouble and uncertainty; and as often as the word again occurs, the reader is again referred numerically to the place of such explanation. So much also of the sacred text is thus passed through, with constant reference by number to the rules of the grammar placed in the end of the book, as that the attentive reader will be hereby made suffi- ciently acquainted with the grammar, without committing it to memory, and enabled without difficulty to parse and construe, with the ordinary helps, every other pai't of the Hebrew Scriptures. The ministers of the Presbyterian church in the United States almost universally read and understand the Greek scriptures for themselves; they can judge of the speculations of various classes of men on the New Testament, and decide without danger; they prefer their Greek Concordances to all the commentaries of the learned; why then should they be at a loss for the very same helps to the un- derstanding of the Old Testament, which would be so satisfactory, and to which they may so easily attain? But a thirst for this species of knowledge has been excited, has progressed rapidly among them, within a few years, and augurs prosperity to Zion. The labour submitted to in compiling this tyronian performance, (which has been the more, because, having been taught originally with the points, I am self-taught in the Hebrew without the points,) has been sweetened by the fond imagination of its subserviency to the cause of our Redeemer. JAMES P. WILSON. AN EASY INTRODUCTION, ^c. THE HEBREW ALPHABET, (U 1 1 !z; s 1 .a As used in the University of St. Andrew's, Edinburgh. o s o XL < J? o tc c 3 CI < 2 3J o B 1 5 O CJ 11 'S S 1 3 M ip 11 « S Q c V r P 2 •l 5 a Aleph K a a a a broad a broad a a mute ' tlie spiritus tenuis J no sound Beth a b b b b b b b bh bh bh or v&b Gimel :i hard hard g hard g hard g hard g hard g gh gh gl^ Daleth n d d d d d d d dh dh dh or J and (1 He n e e e e as in ivhcre e as a in rare e h h'the asper h,' h Vau 1 u u ou lias 00 uas 00 u or V V V V W Zain t n z z soft z z z z z ds z,s in miser 1 Heth h h or » h h hh ch hhor ch hh hh Teth D th,fl. t t th th th t t t t Jod i 1 i or ee i i j,ee or y i or y i J J y &no sound j HEBREW ALPHABET, CONTINUED, is t •3- % rr rn u u .= 1 3 - < O =P '■2 o CI 1 fir •a-3 < M a o to c ■•H o :j B O 1 o s = CJ < t. o a ^l ■■S.2 o.E i ■a § ■a S 3 pq o to ll s t o io s a 6 Do. according to John Taylor of Norwich. iCaph i D 1 k C hard ch,;^ k kh k c ch,;^ ch,;^J kh or ch& e, as in f fl CO, cu Lamed b 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Mem t2 D 111 in m m m m m m m m Nun i 1 n n n n n n n n n n Samech D s s s sh sh s s s s s Gin V 5 a. o o with o long gn hhh ghna gnor final Pe £3 ^ Dor 'ph p ph P por ph p or ph P ph ph,f phor f and j> Tsade V V is tz ts sofi J soft ts ts tz ts tz Qnoph P qu k k, or 4 qor qu k quo?- ch,% q k k or q k or qu Resh 1 ") r r r r r r r r r r Schin i t^' or s sh or s ss s s sh sh sc or sch 8cs sh 8cs I ixau J \ \ n t th th t t t th th th th Sc t NOTE. I'he part of this table, which shows the judgment of the Masorites upon the Hebrew letters, presents a strange phenomenon, a language The learner is advised to acquire some facility in reading the He- brew words in the first instance; in the second place, to read the grammar, which is printed at the end of this book, once carefully; then to begin at the first chapter of Genesis, and leai'n to parse and without vowels, unless their points be such. That their mode of read- ing is according to the original pronunciation, is not only incapable of proof, but wholly incredible. Yet if it even were, the additional labour in which it involves the learner, without any possible advantage, would be a sufficient reason for rejecting it, the correct understand- ing of a dead language by no means depending upon its original pro- nunciation. But whether, by rejecting those points, we reject a part of the word of God; or which is ultimately the same question, whether others have, by an unhallowed hand, added to the sacred text, is an inquiry vastly important. For any to give their views of the divine revelation is allowable; but to remove the vowels which belong to the language in which it is written, and to introduce others in a double pro^jortion, disposing them arbitrarily throughout the sacred text, in such manner as to add whole conjugations of novel and distinct meanings to the verbs. and to bind every word on those holy pages, in chains of their own forming, and all this has been done if the points are a modern inven- tion, admits of no apology. However severe the imputation, if it be not true, why does the Sep- tuagint show names in abundance wholly different from the INIasoretic reading? Why do the Jev/s, who advocate the points, exclude them from the rolls Avhich are read in their synagogues? Why did not Origen, when turning Hebrew into Greek characters, cither omit the Greek vowels, or adopt such as should correspond to the points? {aj But, if they be a late invention, which seems to be the fact, we might with equal propriety consider the traditions and Talmudical writings of the Jews to be of divine authority, and receive for doctrines tlie commandments of men- (rt) Genesis I. 1. Bp»)(7(9 /3apa ExcjH^ £9 a.(Ta.fitx.er aaa-i^. 5. Ovixpu Y.Kaeii/. Xccup ii'jcc wXawirt^- Kitpcc Ad\« m(« ifiG «(« /SuKEf lafi. cckS. This extract from Ori^cri's Hvxapla is taken freni Professor Wilson's Graynmar- Genesis, 8 construe ihe verses at the same time, taking care to consult every rule and number referred to; and frequently to return upon that which he has learned, that the Hebrew words and roots may be fixed in his mind. In acquiring a knowledge of the letters, the first four columns of the preceding table only are to be attended to, unless the manner of sounding the letters in some other column should be preferred to that which is given in the fourth. In reading the Hebrew words, the learner is to advance from the right hand side of the page towards the left. Aleph, He, Vau, Jod, and Oin are to be considered the long vow- els of the language. Short ones, not written, were probably in con- stant use in pronouncing the words in which none of the above five vowels occur; and possibly after most of the consonants not followed by a vowel. That the language, therefore, may not only be more easily and uni- formly read, and sound more agreeably to the ear, but be much more intelligible to the hearei', by distinguishing the numerous prefixes from the foots, the beginner is advised to supply, as he is reading, a short vowel of any kind, suppose e, after every consonant which is neither followed by a long vowel, nor is placed at the end of a word.* Genesis I. 1. Bresiitbara celohijm eet hassamajim veethaarez. 2. Uharoz hajta tohu va- bohu vhhosek al fne thoom vruah celohijm mrahbafet al fne hammajim. 3. Vaj- jomer crlohijm jhi oor vajhi oor. 4. Vajjar a'lohijm eet haoor ki thoob vajjab- deel cElohijm bien haoor vubeen hahhosek. 5. Vajjiqra cclobijna laoor joom vlahhoseh qara laila vajhi areb vajhi boqer joom oehhaad. This JMasoretic reading is taken froin the Annotations of Berlinas on iHartinius's grammar. Whilst the reader makes the comparison, let him remember, that the ques- tion is not, whether any modern readin_^ without the points more nearly ap- proximates Origen's reading, but whether the lattei", in the third century, fgl- lowed tlie points. * The learned Dr. Pocock asserts such frequent use of vowels to have ob- tained in reading the Arabic language, in which, though all the Hebrew let- ters are found and six others, it is said by some there are no vowels, and there- fore three vowel points are sometimes, we suppose officiously also, inserted above and below the lines, but the language is in other instances like the He- brew written without them. His words are, " Qjiod nuspiam in verbo aliquo, genuinae apud Arabes originis, concurrant, non intercedcnte vocalis alicujus motione, consonantes, cum vel tres, vei phires, aliis in Unguis, frequenter coi- lidantuv." Short vowels in our own language are frequently almost lost in speaking; and there are many words, Avhich, if written without them, would become, by a little experience, as intelligible, and be as easily read by us, as those Hebrew words and syllables, Avhich are destitute, of vowels, were by ancient Jewish readers. It is probable, that diphthongs, though discovered by no character, were nevertheless made in the original pronunciation of the lan- guage; but as uniformity in reading will be greatly promoted, if all will agree to omit them, as it is at best a work of mere conjecture, and as the radical letters will be more discernible without such com- binations, the reader is advised to pronounce the vowels also distinctly. The Hebrew language was anciently written without spaces be- tween the words, each sentence jwas therefore free from every stop, unless we except that with which it terminated, the ♦ soph passuc. But the reader must have been much aided in dividing the words, if we can suppose any one who knew the language, to have stood in need of such help, by the use of the five final letters *j, J^, ^ ft, and y, which almost uever fail to indicate the end of the word, to which they respectively belong. The custom also of always terminating the line with an unbroken word, was another help; and lest the sentence should seem divided too much by a space at the end of the line, not large enough for the next word, they extended to a greater width }^' H' H' *?' D' ^"^ ri' ^^ often as either of those letters terminated the preceding word, under such circumstances. B GENESIS I. uat eshemim at Aleim bera Berashit uheshek ubeu teu eite uearets earets 12 -jt^nT 11 inni i« inn 9 nn^n « y-ixni 7 :n«n 2 1. n'K'XiD In the beginnmg. 3 in, is a particle, vide rule 148.* from na hollow, n'lyxi ;Ae beginnings is a noun feminine, vide rule- 1 6, from the noun i7N'^ the head, beginnings firincitial, Ecc. This word, being restricted by no adjunct, can only mean the beginning of time, or of the creation. 2. N13 created. It is in the third person singular, masculine, preter tense in Kal. Vide rule 66. This word expresses the production of Substances, not a change of form, in this place; for it appears afterwards that the matter thus created was without form. 3. D'hSk God. That this noun, which is not unintentionally here joined with the singular verb Ni3 (vide rules 127, 133) is neverthe- less really plural, appears not merely fi'om its termination C (vide rule 19) but by its being frequently joined with adjectives, pronouns, and verbs in the plural; as, " Let un make XW^'^ man, in our image IJoSvD," Sec. Gen. i. 26. It seems probable that it comes from the Arabic word nSx to reverence. Some think from nSx to swear. Others from bx and n' the mighty God. Vid. num. 154, post. 4. r\N. This particle following an active verb, and going before a noun which has the servile n emphatic (vid. rule 151) prefixed, ad- mits of no translation, unless we render it the substance of. Here the sense will allow it, which is rarely the case. This idea perhaps ori- ginated from the circumstance, that nx is composed of the first and last letters of the alphabet. It sometimes maybe rendered to, towards or with, and comes from nnx to afiiiroach. Vide rule 200. Vid. num. 85. 382. It was by the Masoretic grammarians termed the sign of the Accusative case. » S ■ee the grammar at the end of the book. GENESIS I. 1 IN the beginning, God created the heaven and the earth. 2 And the earth was without form and void; and darkness was upon 5. D'DEyn the heavens. T\ the^ is emphatic. Vide rule 151. D"'OtJ' is a noun mascul. found only in the plural. Vid. rule 19. Perhaps the root is Diy, vid. rule 199, to fiut or filace; or from the particle Dty there, and O'D waters; or from niy^ to remit, and CO the waters. 6. rivSl Jnd. 1 and, is a conjunctive particlg. Vide rule 157. For DN vid. num. 4. 7. yMiTl the earth. T\ the. Vide rule 151. pK earth, is a noun com- pounded of >5 formative, rule 147, and y\ a verb, to break in pieces. 8. pxm and the earth. 1 and. Rule 157. H the. Rule 151. pN earth. Vid. num. 7. 9. nrcn wa.s. It is the third pers. fern. sing, preter. Kal of the verb riTl to be. Rule 103. It would be, if regular, HHTl, but it changes its n or last radical letter into n before the servile n of the fern. Vid. rule 102. It agrees with pN in gender, number, and per- son. Vid. rule 127. 10. inn void. This word often occurs in the Scriptures, some- times as an adjective, in other instances as a substantive, but in the same form, except the usual prefixes. Perhaps the root is nn waste, with the formative 1. Rule 162. 11. in31 and ivithout shafie. 1 and. Rule 157. in3 occurs only here and in Isa. xxxiv. 1 1. and Jer. iv. 23, It is of n3 hollow, and i forma- tive. Vide rule 162. 12. "jiym and darkness. 1 and. Rule 157. ysv, as a verb signifies, to tremble or hide, as a noun, darkness. liiTl^l. 1 and, S the. "jB^nn, ths. darkness. Rule 150. 12 jnerehepct Aleini uruhc teum peiu 6l aur iei Aleim Uiamer .emim peni ol 21 -n^? 20 ^n» 3 d^h^k i^ ^Di^n is jd^dh 14 »iD 13 by s 13. ^7;; «/2ora, is a particle from T)h}^ to ascend. Sj! is also above, con- cerning, besides, to, near, with, &c. and sometimesybr the sake of. 14. 'ja the face of. It is a noun mascul. found in the plural only. It is here in construction, vide rule 24, for D'Ji) faces or face, and derived from nJ3 fo behold. Vid. rule 200. 15. Dinn Ml? dff'/z. n is formative of the noun. Vide rule 189, The formative 1 is also to be rejected. Vide rule 195. The fern, noun Dinr> comes from nan to tumultuate, vid. R. 200 and num. 18. 16. nm and the Spirit. )and. Rule 157. nil as a verb, to inhale, as a noun, air in motion, the soul of man, the Holy Spirit, whose existence like the air is certain, though he be invisible. 17. naniD causi7tg a motion, is the participle Benoni fem. in Hiphil, vid. I'ule 75, of ^m to shake, the ■" as frequently, is here omitted. Vid. rul. 81. It agrees in gender and number Avith nn. Vid. rul. 115. 113. For the omission of nn^n was, vid. rule 144. 18. W'OXy the waters, n the. R. 151. D'D waters is by contraction for D"n the plural of the mascul. noun 'D water. This word and U" the sea, in the plur. D'D' seas, and also DV a day, in the plural D'O' days, are all derived from nDn to make a noise. 19. "IDN^I and God said. 1 and, is in this case conversive. Vide rules 57. 136. and the note infra.* ~iO>s" said, is the third person masc, sing. fut. Kal of "^fcx to speak. Vid. rule 194. Postea ionS saying, has been called a gerund, the iniinitive of Kal, and by others the participle Benoni Kal, the i being dropped, as is very usual. Vid. rule 78. The b is a prefix. Rules 175. 142. 20. ''n' there shall be. It is the third pers. m. sing. fut. Kal, for n'n"' dropping n final in the future, being a verb defective in Lamed He. See rule 102. From n'n to exist. 21. iiN light. A noun, by rule 195, from *1N tofiow. For 1 inserted, see rule 158. It is used with n emphatic in the next veise. Rule 150. Vide num. 23, 398. * \ is termf d merelr conjunctive, when it connects similar tenses , / 1 r> the face of the deep: and the Spirit of God moved u^wn the face of the waters. 3 And God said, Let there be light: and there was light. in the same sense; or when it supplies the place of signs of persons, moods, tenses, and numbers. Vide rule 139. It is said to be convtr- sive, when it changes the signification of a future, into that of a pre- ter tense; or the sense of a preter into that of a future. The five following rules are taken from Granville Sharp, and supported by numerous examples. Their accuracy is submitted to the critical reader. Rule I. " 1 prefixed to future tenses converts them to perfect tenses; and when prefixed to verbs in the perfect tense, it regularly converts them to the future tense. This is the nccessanj construction for both cases (not only " interdum" so?neti?7ieSf as the grammarians tell us, but) always, constantly and regularly, in everij sentence, that is inde- pendent of the three particular circumstances described in the sub- sequent three rules, or general exception. " The only instance o( irregularity or particular exception, respec- ting i, that I have been able to find, is in that portion of the 119th Psalm, wherein 1 is the leading letter cf each sentence, as an acrostic ov alfihabetical psalm; which probably ought to be considered merely as ^poetical license for that kind of composition. Rule II. " When 1 is prefixed to a verb, which immediately follows another verb of the same tense, without a prefixed 1, and in the same sentence, the *i in that case is merely conjunctive, and the second verb to which it is prefixed (and even a third or fourth, if they arc of the same tense, and follow in the same sentence with a prefixed 1 to each,) must be construed according to \\.% proper tense, whether y)//wre or imperative, and often also xh.Q perject tense; but not always; as there ai-e a few instances of exception. Rule III. ^' A prefixed 1 does not affect, or convert any verb, in the impera- tive mood, nor any verb, or verljs in the future tense, which follow an imperative mood in the same sentence. But to perfect tenses the 14 kx eaur at Aleim Uira .aur uiei eheshek ubin eaur bin Aleim uibedel thub '2ncrm 28 yy\ 21 ^^j^n 28 p 3 D»n'7K 27 »7-tan 26 y\o quera uleheshek ium laur Aleim Uiquera 29 Nnp 12 -jt2?n'7i 30 C3V 21 niK*? 3 d^h*??^ 29 f^-^p^^ 5 ahed ium bequer uiei oreb uiei lile 34 nnK 30 tDv 33 •ip:! 22 ♦nn 32 ^ny 22 ^nn 31 nVS 22, 'n"1 c?2(/ there was. ) conversive. See num. 19, For "TT' see num. 20. 23. "iix light. See num. 21. Caloric or latent heat has been supposed to be here principally intended. As a verb it is most frequently ren- dered to shine, or enlighten., also to kindle, to set onjire, to be glorious; as a noun, light, the sun, Jire, the morning, lightning, urim, herd>s, &c. "iInS, ^7 for '^W the. prefixed l is conversive without hindrance from a preceding impera tive verb. Rule IV. " After an interrogation, either of the emphatical n, or of the in- terrogatory relatives "D or no, the prefixed 1 dotli not influence any verb, or verbs o^ ihii future tense, or the firesent tense; but \n perfect tenses, the 1 is regularly conversive, and is not influenced by a pre- ceding interrogation. Rule V. " l^SL future tense put for a preterperfect tense" (which must be by having a prefixed i) " precedes a preter tense," (having alse a pre- ;fixed l) "the latter is (merely) copulative." The use of this rule, most probably, will very seldom occur, but the following example has been found in 1 Sam. vii. 16. '7Knky l2DW^ (a future tense converted to a preter tense) and Samuel judged Israel all the days of his life: "j"'ni and he went from year to year, ^301 and he circuited Bethel, and Gilgal, and Mispeh, (the Vans prefixed to the two last verbs are merely copulative, because the preceding verbis a convert- ed future, and the next verb which follows is also a converted future) L^atyi and he judged Israel in all these places. 15 4 And God saw the light that it was good; and God divided the light from the darkness. 5 And God called the light day, and the darkness he called night. And the evening and the morning were the first day. 24. XT1 and God saw. "I convers. Vide num. 19. XT for nxT 3d pers. masc. sing. fut. Kal of nxi to see. It drops the n final in the future. See rule 102. 25. O t/iat. By rule 202. nriD to restrain, is the root. Vide num. 393. It is rendered, yea, though, because, surely, but, ivhcn, therefore, and often interrogatively. 26. 2^12 good. By rule 195 is found i£3 to be good. Hence DIM masc^ n3i£3 fem. ^oorf. Rule 158. num. 538. 27. Sn^'i and God divided. 1 conversive. Vide num. 19. bl^' is the 3d pers. m. sing. fut. Kal of Sli to divide. As a noun, a pari separated. Also i:: is separate, and n3^ apart. 28. J"2 between. From p to divide. Rule 195. The repetition of this particle in this verse is not singular, nor an idiom peculiar to the He- brew language. Postea j'^D/row between. Rules 176. 145. p3l and be- tween. Rule 157. 29. X-^pM anrf God called. 1 and convers. Num. 19. Xip'' is the Sd pers. masc. sing. fut. Kal of X"(p to call. See num. 412. 30. UV day. Rule 195, from nori to make a noise. The plural is 0"D' vid. num. 18. 558. Dvn by day. Barker observes that adverbs in Hebrew " are formed from every part of speech, and are as various as there are circumstances of an action." 31. nS^S night. A noun fem. Rules 16. 153. The root by rule 195 is Tl to move round. Also nS'S by night. 32. 31;? evening. A noun masc. sing, from y^^^ to mix. The twilight is a mixture of light and darkness. 33. 1p3 morning. A noun masc. sing, from 1p3 to survey, or look nut; the moaning looks out of the east. 34. nnx one. See num. 486. Reject the formative x. Rule 147. the root is nn"' to «m7f.Rule 196. 16 eri)im betuk requro iei Aleim Uiamer 18 cs^'jri 36 -jini 35 y»p*^ 20 ^n* 3 d^hSk ^^ idk^ ^ Aleivn Uiosh .lemim mim bin inebedil uiei 3 tD'r^hi^ 28 {j^vMT 1 8 :d»;:3«7 1 a D»i53 28 ^*;i 37 ^niD 22 »nn 7 metehet asher emim bin uibedel erequio at 41 nnnD ^o nti^» ^^ d^dh 28 ^^i 39 «7^:i»i S5 v»pnn * hk lerequio mol asher emim ubin lerequio 42 ytp-i^^ 43 »7y;o 40 y^i^ is CD»^n 28 ]'>y\ 42 y^p^-^S uiei shemim lerequio Aleim Uiquei'a .ken uiei 22 ♦nn 5 D^Dty 42 y^p-j'^ 3 D»^1^^e 29 j^-^p^i 44 jp 22 »n»^ 8 Aleim Uiamer .sheni ium bequer uiei oreb 3 D>^S^C 19 l;;;;jj^»T 45 MJtJ^ 30 QV 33 ^pl 22 ^n^ 32 n^V ^ mcquum al eshemim metehet emim iquuu 48 c"ip,o 47 bf^ 5 D^Dtt^n 41 nnnD i8 o^^n 46 iip* 35. ;''pn an expanse. ' is formative. Rule 165. The root is j^p"! to expand. Rule 194. Postea with n emphatic. 36. "jinn in the midst of. 3 in a prefix. Rule 148. "jin a noun, the middle; 1 is formative. Rules 158, 9. It is from ^n to cut or divide. Rule 195. 37. Vn:3D causing a division. Rule 73. Masc. sing. part. Ben. Hi- phil of Si3. Num. 27. Rule 75. 38. V!^^^ and God 7nade. ) convers. Num. 19. C?;;' for nty;^' is the 3d pers. m. sing. fut. Kal of n'^iiy to make. It is a verb in Lamed He, and drops its n final in the future. Vide rule 102. 39. Sn3"1 and he divided. 1 convers. Num. 19. SnT is the 3d pers. m. sing. fut. Kal of SlD to divide. Ante num. 27. 37. As on the first day, light was separated from the chaos, so on the second was air; and this division was effected by an expansion, as ;'pi signifies; there is obvious impropriety therefore in the use of the term firmament here, as if the heavens were a solid body, and the stars and planets attached to it. 40. nB^N which. Also w/io, whom, that. A relative of every gender, num- ber, and person. Vide rules 134, 135. As a verb logo before, to proa- per, to esteem. As a noun, a step, progress, success. As a particle, where, because, that, as, when. 41. nrvno under, d at or from. Rules 176. 145. nnn iinder. Reject 17 6 And God said, Let there be a firmament in the midst of the wa- ters, and let it divide the waters from the waters. 7 And God made the firmament and divided the waters which were under the firmament from the waters which were above the firma- ment; and it was so, 8 And God called the firmament Heaven. And the evening and the morning were the second day. 9 And God said, Let the waters under the heaven be gathered to- gether into one place and let the dry land appear: and it was so. also the formative n prefixed. Rule 189. 194. then place 1 before the two radicals, vid. rule 200, and the root will be found to be nnJ to descend. 42. ^'"'piS the expanse. S prefixed, vid. rule 175, sometimes has the sense of a pronoun or article, that or the., and seems to be abridged from Si>', which is used in the same sense, and as a verb signifies to intervene^ or interfiose. Sn preceding, or S prefixed, signifies also ?o, among., towards., at., near., as tOy Jbr, according to, instead of, about, ivithf within, after, &c. J^''pt, vide num. 35. 39.* 43. ^yo above. D prefixed. Rules 176. 1*45. From p or r\^T:i to distri- bute; it has various meanings, from, without, before, against, more than, from being; and is also negative, lest, not, i^ ufion, above, vide in num. 13. h^^Tifrom above, from upon, more than, near, &c. 44. p so. From p to prepare, p *"inN after that time. pS therefore. p h^ wherefore, or accordingly, p Ij; to this time, p also signifies, certainly, surely, thus, because, and in Psalm cxxvii. 2. instead of so, it should be rendered yMsZ/y or rightly ^ for p as a noun signifies right; unless ^2 but is the true reading, which is not supported. 45. 'JK? second. For the formative ' vide rule 168. From HJiy to re- peat. Rule 200. Vide the table at num. 486. 46. lip"' shall be gathered together. For imp' vid. rule 102. It is the 3d pers. m. plur. fut. Niphal of nip to collect. It agrees with D'on. Rule 127. 4f . S« to. See in num. 42. Sometimes it is negative, not, but. Sec. At other times it is used before the object of a verb, as nx num. 4. 48. Dipo/z/ace. D is formative. Rule 178. So is 1. Rules 158, 159. From Dp to be established. By rule 195. * When either of the letters 3, 2, or S are prefixed to a noun, they usually exclude n emphatic. C 18 uiquera ken uiei eibeshe uterae ahed quera emim ulemeqviue arets libeshe Aleim Uia. «er .thub ki Aicim uira irnim 19 IDm 26 mo 25 ♦^ 3 D^n*?K 24 }<-^>1 52 D*)2> H mezcrio osheb desha carets tedesha Aleitn 56 y»-itD 55 :i{i?jr 54 «t!^-i 8 y-|{^n 53 ,st2^in 3 t3^r\^^ asher leminu peri oshe peri ots zero 40 '-^^i^ 61 «)yj2«7 59 1-|£) 60 HtJ^J? 59 ^fl 58 ^V 57 y-^t 49. nN^n1 and shall a/ifiear. 1 a«c?. riNin is the 3d pers. fern. sing, fut. Niphal of HNi ;o «ee. It agrees with |*iK understood. Rule 127. 50. nwTn the dry scil. I'lN land, n emphatic. R. 150. n postfixed formative. Rule 153. ntJ/H' a noun fem. from ^T to be dry, 51. nipoSi and the gathering together of. 1 anrf, S the. Num. 42. D is formative. Rule 178. mpD confluence, from nip to collect. Vide num. 46. 52. D'D"' the seas. Vide num. 18. This contrast -with Q'D preceding fixes the distinction between "'D water and D' sea. 53. NB'nn 5/ia// bring forth. The 3d pers. fem. sing. fut. Kal of Nl^T ?o sfiring ufi. It agrees with yiNn. 54. iW\ grass^ the tender herb. A noun from Xtyn. Vide num. 53. 55. ytO^ the herb. A noun. As a verb, to/iroduce vegetatioji. 56. y^''\''0 producing seed. Particip. Benoni masc. sing. Hiphil of ;?1I to sow or to produce seed. Rule 75. 57. ;?1I seed. A noun masc. from the same root. Num. 56. 58. y]} the tree of. A noun masc. from tTHi? to fix, make firm, or steady.* 59. '")3 fruit. A noun masc. sing. "• is formative. Rule 171. From ni3 to produce. Hence postea "^2 a bull, plural Dni3. Also m3 a heifer. 60. 7W}} beaiing. Participle Benoni Kal masc. 1 omitted by rule 78. From V.W}^ to bear. * ""13 "j! is here the tree of fruit, that is the fruit-tree; but the same 19 10 And God called the dry land Earth; and the gathering together of the waters called he Seas: and God saw that it was good. 1 1 And God said, Let the earth bring forth grass, the herb yielding seed, and the fruit tree yielding fruit after his kind, whose seed is in itself, upon the earth; and it was so. 61. U'dS according to its kind, h a particle. Vid. num. 42. 1 suffixed, fiis. Vide rules 39. 160. j'O kind, a noun masc. sing, in which ' being formative, rule 165. is to be rejected, rule 195. when n is to be post- fixed, vide rule 200. and the root is found to be njo to distribute.* form of speech is used to signify ^fruitful tree. In Hebrew the lat- ter of two substantives is frequently adopted instead of an adjective; as The land of holiness, for The holy landj Men of a name, for Celebra- ted men; A God of justice, for A just God, &c. * This word affords some evidence of the truth of the concession in the Glasgow grammar, that " the cases of nouns are more deter- mined by the connexion and sense of the passage than from the pre- position." But in Hebrew there are no cases. Vide rule 14. When two nouns stand together, so that the latter would occupy the genitive case in English, Latin, or Greek; the former in Hebrew frequently undergoes a change in termination, it being in fact the word, the sense of which is limited or restricted. Vide rules 24. 27. Preposi- tions prefixed to nouns answer the purposes of oblique cases, with the exception of the constructed case mentioned. With respect also to the primitive pronouns, the agent and the object are usually ex- pressed by different words, as in English, which may be denomina- ted cases. Nevertheless the learner will find it to contribute both to his con- venience and speed, to know the cases of nouns and pronouns, as they are given in the old grammars. On this account, they are here sub- joined in a condensed form. mm Fern. A law. '^\y^ Masc. A word. Plur. nnin nninS Sing. mm mmSa? mmS Plur. Sing. IDT Nom. Gen. Dat. A word. Of a word. To a word nmnnN n"imnx Dn^nnx •i3inx Ace. The word. nmnn mmn onann i2nn Voc. O word. ninno mmn Dn310 "i3nrD Abl. By a word-. 20 Ututsa .ken ui6i carets ol bu zerou 64 e^^;1m 44 jp 22 ♦nn » x'li^r] ^^ hv ^^ u ^2 lynr ^^ uots letYiineu zero mezerio osheb desha carets 58 YVI 63 ^^i»aS ^7 V-,t 56 yntD 55 ll^;^ 54 ^^^ 8 y-^f^H SINGULAR. She, Her. He, Him. Thou , Thee, f. Thou, Thee, m. I, me. *<'n «in m nnx OJN 'JN Norn. 7}hw iSty ii^ iSaf 'Sty* Gen. nS iS f> 1^ 'b Dat. nnv? iniN y.Mi •]nix 'niN Accus, njDD UDO ^OD pD 'JD 'JDD Ablat. PLURAL. They, They, You, fern. You, m. We, Us. Them, f. Them, m. run p nnn on n, \r\i< Dn« unjN unj Nom. rnStj' 'pS DnSiy pSiy ddSu? i^Siy Gen. loS nnS P'' ddS u^ Dat. jms nm>< pm D3n>< i^niN Accus. pn □HD pna DDOD 1 3D 13DD 1 Ablat. As parts of the primitive pronouns, both singular and plural, are postfixed to nouns, masculine and feminine, singular and plural; (vide rules 33 — 42) and as their terminations undergo, in some instances, changes in regimen, (vide rules 24 — 27) because of the suffixes; the learner, by making also the following table somewhat familiar, will save himself both time and labour. ,1. Fern. plur. Fem. sing. Masc. plur. Masc. sing. My. t/3 'nnin 'mm nmt nan Thy, m. !3 £ ynnin imin y-i3T r^n Thy, f. ^^^n1n in-iin y-iai 113T His. Sd* rnmn imin rial n;DT Her. c C/3 n"nmn nmm nnan man Our. , 1 irnmn umin irt3T W2T Your, m. (4-1 3 . DD'nnin DDn"iin DDn:3n DD-ian Your, f. aral s fixes p-nmn pnmn pn3T P"I31 Their, m. Dn'nnin Dmin Dnn3i ma-T Their, f. 1 E p^nnin }n-)in jnn^T pan * 'bt? has been said to be only 'h the dative and lif for "la^K tv/io. "bty iTa Domus quae est mihi. Vide num. 151. t For 'naT. 21 i2 And the earth brought forth grass, and herb yielding seed after his kind, and the tree yielding fruit, whose seed was in itself after his kind; and God saw that it ivas good. 62. i;;ii its seed. 1 suffixed, its, vide rules 39. 160.* ;ni, see num. 57. 63. V. in itself. 3 a prefix, rule 148, from HD hoUaxo or ^'3 within. l a pronoun suffix of the third person. Rule 39. f 64. Kyini and brought forth. 1 convers. num. 19. KXin is the 3d pers. fern. sing. fut. Hiphil of Ni"' to sfiring up, ' being changed into i, rule 89, and ' characteristic of Hiphil being dropped. Rule 81. It agrees with I'^Kn. 65. \T\,Yrhfor its kind. IH a pronoun suffix of the third person. Rule 39. For I'dS see num.61. Perhaps the sense of the genitive may have been here intended, as it is in Psal. cxvi. 15. vnonV " o/"his saints." Vide num. 42. * Parts of primitive pronouns, when suffixed to nouns substantive, having the sense of possessives, and the nature of adjectives, must, when translated into Latin or Greek, agree with such substantives in gender, number, and case. But the Hebrew language, in such in- stances, with much more propriety, preserves the gender of the an- tecedent, to which such pronoun may relate, and does not accommo- date the gender of the possessive to that of the noun with which it stands. Thus in'3 and nn''3 are each sua domus, but the former is his house, and the latter her house. Hence it seems proper to denominate the pronominal suffixes firimidves, when affixed to nouns, as well as when conjoined with finite verbs, and particles, though with the for- mer, they have the sense of possessives, and when with the latter, they generally denote the object. Vide rule 29. t The neuter in English is often properly substituted, because the Hebrew language has no neuter. Here follow the usual pronominal suffixes with 3. 1.T in him, n3 m her, p in thee, ''2 in me, 1D3 or DHJ in them, masc. {n3 in them, fern. DD3 in yoxi, masc. p3 in you, fem. and 133 in us. 3 is also into, with, on account of, and among; in this sense, following an adjective, it expresses the superlative degree, as D"kyJ3 T\ii^T\fair amojig women, that is, very fair. 22 uira lemineu bu zerou asher peri oshe 24 iiy) 65 -inj^DS 63 n 62 ly-ji 40 ^{y}^ 59 ^5 60 nt^v bequer uiei oreb Uiei .thub ki Alei-n 35 ^p2 22 ♦nn 32 :i-iy 22»nn 26j2itD 25*3 scs^n^K 13 maret iei Aleim Uiainer .shelishi i\im •^« nnt^D 67 ♦n* 3 D^n'?^ i^-iok^ 66 ♦^t:^^'?^ 30 qv ^^ ubin eium bin lebedil eshemim bereqriio 28 '^iy\ 30 ovn 28 |»n 70 '^nnnb 5 CD^Dirn ^9 y»p-^2 uUmim iiJemuodim latet Ueiu .ei ie 74 }o'>f2'b) 73 onviDbi 72 nn^S 71 vni 31 :nybn 15 eshemim bere^^uio lemduret iieiu ushenim 5 D^otrn 77 v»p-i^ 76 nmKoS 71 vni 75 D':itJ^i I I . — I , .1 - 1 ■ , I - 66. 'ty^Sty the third. Vide num. 486. From lySi!; fo rfmrfe into three parts. For ^ inserted and postfixed, see rule 168. 67. 'n" ;A(?r^ 22 t^^^ 26 J^^^ 19 91^53 90Y'ijy I'D^DTi 8n^f"it:^» s^^nbi^ i9-ia}^»T2o 35 y»p-| u i^Q 13^t;8 vni^n 13 'jy 94 f^f)«|y^ 93 ^1571 92 n*n 100 ))i^^ 40 -itTK 99 nt^^Dnn 98 n»nn 9 1 i^'idj ^7 ^73 b ^^^^ 102 t^j3 93 p^iy 97 i;^:) 6 nKI i>^' DnyD*7 18 D^DH 88. ■'jr^m the fourth. In the ordinal numbers from the third to the ?e«r/r inclusive, ' is inserted before the last radical, except in the siz-^A, and also postfixed in the masculine gender. Vide rule 168. and num. 486. The root is J?:3"i to agitate or quadrate; hence also, by- prefixing a formative x, comes the cardinal y^^'^four. 89. l^fTk^' shall produce abu?idantly. It is the third pers. masc. plur. fut. Kal, from the root yity to swarm, or creep. It agrees with D'D. Rule 127. 90. pB' the reptile. This word may be taken as a noun; or as the part. Ben. Kal of the preceding verb, 1 being rejected by rule 78, the sense then is the creeping ly-JJ HTl. 91. 1^33 the creature. Also the soul., and ajiimal life. 't^SJ iny life., from tyi3J to breathe. This word, like •^vx.vi, may signify the animal soul. Vide Whitby and Macknight on 1 Thess. v. 23. 92. rrn living. It is the part. Ben. Kal of rrn to live. Vide rules 86 and 78. Also a living creature. The genus is expressed by 1^3: rrn living creature; the species arq DIN man, nnnn beast of the field., in-n wild beast, IJ'D"! reptile, and ^IJ^/ow/, Sec. 93. ^i;?1 and fowl. ^ and. A participial noun. Rule 158. From ^yto fiy- 94. ^"sT shall fiy. It is the third pers. sing. masc. fut. Kal of «]3;; te fly. 1 is inserted after the first radical, as is sometimes the case in re- duplicate verbs, vide rule 111. but its usual place, when inserted in other verbs, is before the last radical in the fut. and imper. Vide rule 77. 95. ^'yy\ and {QiQ^ created. 1 con vers. Num.19. It is the third pers. masc. sing. fut. Kal. Vide num. 2. 27 19 And the evening and the morning were the fourth day. 20 And God said. Let the waters bring forth abundantly the naoving creature that hath life, and let the fowl fly above the earth, over the face of the firmament of heaven. 21 And God created great whales, and every living creature that moveth, which the waters brought forth abundantly after their kind, and every winged fowl after its kind, and God saw that it was good. 96. Dyjnn whales. T\ emphat. Rule 150. A noun masc, plur. The sing, is \'ir\ a whale'ov serpent. Rule 19. From p»"i to creeji, which is perhaps a reduplicate verb from run to wail. Rule 1 10. 97. ^7:3 every ^ all, or any. It has been supposed that this word is a substantive, because it is said always to precede the noun with which it is used, which is the invariable rule of a noun in regimine; whereas adjectives commonly follow their substantives. Also Sd is used for the feminine, which is somewhat singular, if an adjective; for adjec- tives generally terminate, if feminine, in n. Yet as a noun in con- struction it is difficult to render it in English, for it must be the all 9f, or the whole of. It is from the root T^D to comfilete. 98. n"nn living, n emphat. Rule 150. and vide num. 92. 99. ntyD*^n creefiing. T^ emphat. when thus prefixed to a participle often denotes that it is to be taken as a substantive, ntyo") is the part, fern. Ben. Kal of lyoi to creep. For the omission of i vide rule 78. 100. ^-^^^ produced abundantly . It is the third pers. masc. plur. pret. Kal. Vide num. 89. 101. DnrnS in their kind. S in or to. Rule 175. |'D kind. Vid. num. 61. on their^ them. Suffix. Vide rule 40. 102. f^JD the wing. A noun from 'I^D to remove to a distance. 103. "I"I3'1 and blessed.* ) and is conversive. Rule 136. num. 19. ■]-i2"' is the third pers. m, sing. fut. Kal of p^ to bless. * To bless any thing is to speak good of it or to it. This is the sense of the Hebrew and Greek words for to bless. When God bless- es, he speaks good to the person or thing, he approves or communi- cates good. When man blesses God, he speaks good of him, or as- cribes goodness to him. In the former, it is an expression of benefi- cence, in the latter, of gratitude. 28 ' 103 '•py^ 26 J^^tD 25 O 3 a»n^t^ 24 J^-^)^ 65 ^^0*7 2^ 106 '^yi) '05 i-it) 104 -iotf«7 3. D»n^« 85 DHH 109 ;i-^» 108 t^iyni 18 D»D^1 i8 d^qh 4 nfC lor i}^*?^^ 110 :»t:;»^p 30 CDv 33 -)pn 22 tnn 32 ^15? 22 »n»^ 7 jy^t^a 25 92 n»n ?' trsji 8 v"i«n 64 j^vf^n 3 D»n*?K '^ -^oj^^i 24 1 1 1 nroS 7 V1J? 1 14 ir^^ni 1 '-3 tjf^-)T 112 ;^j2r\2 ^ 1 1 n:i»D*7 7 vnxn 1 14 n»n 4 nj< 3 d^h'jk 33 e^vn 44 jp 1 22 ♦nn 25 104. '^nvh in saying. S ^o or in. Rule 175. IDX is the part. Benoni Kal. Rule 78. From 1DK ^o speak. ' 105. no be fruitful. For ims. Rule 102. It is the 2d pers. masc» plur. imperat. Kal of ni3 io increase. 106. mi cncf multifily. 1 «wc?. D"i for \T\'ZX Rule 102. It is the second pers. masc. plur. iraperat. Kal of n:n to multiply. 107. inSdi and replenish. 1 and. InSd is the 2d pers. m. plur. imper. Kal ofxSn to fill. 108. f]i;rni and fowl. 1 and. n emphat. Rule 150. For ^V fotut. Vide num. 93. 109. 3T shall multiply. For n3T. Rule 102. It is the third pers. masc. sing. fut. Kal of n3i. Vide num. 106. 110. "t^'on theffth. For the ' final and "■ inserted, vide rule 168. and num. 486. From K^Dny?T;e, and as a verb, to increase. 111. nrnS after its kind. S is prefixed. Rule 175. n her or its is a fem. pron. suff. Rules 39. 155. For pD kind., vide num. 61. 1 12. riDna cattle. A fem. noun from Dn3 to be mute. Vide num. 92. 1 13. t^DII and reptile. 1 a?zo?. t^DI a noun masc. sing. ofJffO") to move. Num. 99. 1 14. iD'ni and living creature. 1 conjunctive. IHTI is used as a sin- gular and as a plural noun. Vide rule 162. where it is termed a col- lective noun.* If the 1 be merely a pleonasm, then nTi maybe either * Anomalies in the Hebrew language ar« frequent, notlns are ©f- 29 22 And God blessed them, saying, Be fruitful and multiply and fill the waters in the seas, and let fowl multiply in the earth. 33 And the evening and the morning were the fifth day. 24 And God said, Let the earth bring forth the living creature after his kind, cattle, and creeping thing, and beast of the earth after his kind, and it was so. 95 And God made the beast of the earth after his kind, and cattle the plural of rrn a bgast, vide rule 21. and num. 92. or the singular in construction, n being changed into n, as in the next verse. Vide rule 26. It is from the root HTI to live. t The substantive verb riT! to be, because of its frequent use should be well understood. Though it follows the rules for other verbs in Lamed He, its Kal is here given for the convenience of the learner, because not usually exhibited in the grammars. Feminine. Masculine. Fern. Mascul. 'nn or n^nn 'n^ or H'H' 3 Per. S. nn'n n-n 3 Sing. ^nn or "nn 'nn or H'nn 2 c n'norn"'n 2 ff 'HNor n^HN 1 a> 'n^^n 1 ft *n, p^nn VT\' 3 Plur. H rn 3 Plur. tn, p'nn rnn 2 3 {n^n an^n 2 3 Ui n 'm orrrni 1 n • ir'H 1 "n or rrn 2 Sin^, ? , fern. ™-n masc. m 2 Plur. 5 Inoperative. n'n or rn or nrn Infinitive. Being, or she is, or he is iT'lH or mn Sing. > Participle Fern. They are niin masc. They are D'ln Plur. 5 Benoni. The Hebrews usually intended the present tense when this verb was omitted, but understood; when it was expressed, or given, its tense was generally past, or future like other verbs. Vide num. 557. 642. ten singular in form and plural in sense, or plural in form and sin- gular in sense, and these are indifferently connected with singular or plural pronouns, adjectives, or verbs. As there is no neuter gender, * njTin Jer. xviii. 21. f rrnn Exod. xxii. 31. 30 26 *y\^ 25 O 3 CnS^ 24 {^"^l") 65 iHi^D^? ^^^ HI^IXH 93 f^iy:i'^ 18 o^n 121 njiii 120 i-i-^tT 119 i^hidid 113 tTDnn 97 S^nup^}^ 97 h^Dii 112 nonm 5 a'D^n ^ n« 3 D^n^N 2 «-i2'i 7 j^-|t'J we will make. It is the first pers. plur. fut. Kal of the verb T\'\a'j to make. Postea n;j?;'n 2d pers. sing. fut. Kal. 117. Di« man. TVi^-^ \?, likeness horn T\m. Vid. num. 115. Adam may have been so called because, he at first bore the image of God; or he may have been named fi-om the red clay., because he was made of the earth. 1 18. IJnSi"^ zn our image. 3 in. 13 our., a pronoun suffix. Vide rule ;)5. "dl'i image, from 0^72^ to delineate. See num. 3. " Let us make man," is an expression of consultation, and marks a difference in man's creation from that of other creatures, in point of importance. " Let us make man," regards the animal nature; " In our image," denotes his spiritual nature, which alone could resemble Deity. " Let us make," &:c. " in our image, after our likeness." Here is the plu- a word that in English would belong to that class is often found in both the masculine and feminine gender in the same sentence. There are also instances of the same noun occurring as a masculine in one sense, and as a feminine when the meaning is different. These seem- ing irregularities occasion sometimes doubt, but as they belong to the language, they form no ground for the imputation of ignorance in the sacred penmen. Vide num. 910. 31 after their kind, and every thing that creepeth upon the earth after his kind, and God saw that it was good. 26 And God said, Let us make man in our image, after our like- ness; and let them have dominion over the fish of the sea, and over the fowl of the air, and over the cattle, and over all the earth, and over every creeping thing that creepeth upon the earth. 27 So God created man in his own image, in the image of God cre- ated he him, male and female created he them. 28 And God blessed them: and God said unto them. Be fruitful and ral three times expressed, and that in the first person, a manifest agreement with, and proof of, the scriptural doctrine of a plurality in Deity, to which, as God is one in essence, we give the u^m^ fier sons . 1 19. unimD according to our likeness. 3 accordzjig to. Vide rule 173 U our. Vide rule 35. mm similitude, a fem. noun, vide rule 16. from HDT to make smoot/i, or to form. 120. nri and they shall govern. ^ and. HT for imr in the 3d pers masc. plur. fut. Kal of mi to rule. Vide rule 102. In ver. 28, post, it is m the 2d pers. plur. imper. Kal. 121. nana over the fish. 3 in. mi in construction for njn a fish Vid rule 26. Of JT to multifihj. 122. lynin creefiing. n emphatic, or ivhich. K?D1 the part. Ben. Kal Vid. rule 78, of lyD-) to creeju Which is creeping is a Hebrew present tense. 123. IdSm in his oivn image. 2 in. 1 his. Vide rule 39= For dSv vide num. 1 18. 124 IHK him. For nx, vide num. 4, and 85. 1 him, a pronoun suffix- ed. Vide rule 39. 125. I3r male. A noun from the root "iDT to remember, and perhaps to be strong. "^ 126. n3pJl and female. 1 and. r^:^^^ a noun from 3p:. 127. onS to them, h to. Vide rule 175. DH them. Vide rule 40. nS to her 7 and n. Rule 175.39. 128 na for in-i£3 be fruitful. It is the 2d pers. masc. plur. imperat. Kalofn"i3 to produce. Vide rule 102. 129. nni for ina-i multiply, and y and. 2d pers. masc. plur. imp. Kal «f n3T to multiply. Vide rule 102. 32 132 nty^Din 1 14 n»n 97 ^^^^i ^ D*otyn ^^ j^iyii is D^n 130. iN'?r3l and Jill. 1 a^rf. IX^D is the 2d pers. masc. plur. imp. Kal from'x'^D to Jill. 131. niy33i c?zrf aubdue it. 1 arzrf. H it. Vid. rule 39.* 2^33 iovW22 the 1 cnrf making the root signify the same as if in the ad pers. plur. imperat. Kal which precedes it. Vide rule 139, Thus the 1 conjunc- tive can supply the want of the signs of person, number, mood, and tense, by uniting its verb to the former. 132. n-fcyain that moveth. Ti which. HB'Di is the fem. part. Benorii Kal. Vide num. 122. It agrees with n"'n. Rule 113. 115. * When parts of the primitive pronouns are prefixed to verbs, they form persons, mostly in the future, and if there be no other change, are readily distinguished by the learner. But when parts of such pronouns are postfixed, they not only form persons and tenses, but are often put to express the object of such verb, and must be re- cognised as abbreviations suffixed, instead of the primitive pronouns themselves. When such compounded word happens to be different from the verb itself in any of its forms, the reader, if acquainted with these, and also Avith the suffixes, can instantly discern that the word is thus double, and distinguish its parts. But it often happens that the addi- tion of an affix to the verb produces a word exactly sisnilar to some other part of the same verb, as in this case; and the reader can only determine by the sense or connexion, whether a pronoun is the ob- jectof the verb, and appears in the affix, or the servile or serviles at the end of the word indicate its mood, tense, and person. Presuming that the learner, after a few lessons, will endeavour to parse by his lexicon and grammar, and use these notes only as a test to show him wherein he has failed, I here subjoin a few of such si- milar words, framed out of lpi3 in Kal, that he may compare others with them, and he will find that they will serve with equal advantage also for other conjugations or voices. 55 multiply, and replenish the earth, and subdue it; and have dotnlnion over the fish of the sea, and over the fowl of the air, and over every living thing that moveth upon the earth. Is the third pers. fern. sing, preter Kal, she hath -visited. Is the third pers. masc. sing. pret. Kal, with n her. He visited her. Or the second pers. masc. sing, imper. with n her. Visit thon^ man, her. Is the infin. Kal with n her. To visit her. Or the parti- ciple Benoni Kal, 1 being dropped, (Rule 78.) with n her. Visiting her. np3 nnp3 <^ amps tmpa A fis the third pers. plur. preter Kal. They have visited. Or the second pers. masc. plur. imperat. Visit ye, scil. males. Is the second pers. masc. sing, imperat. Kal, with i him. Visit thou (man) him. Or the 3d pers. m. sing. pret*. Kal with 1 him. He visited him. Is the infin. Kal with 1 him. To visit him. Or the parti- j ciple Ben. Kal (Rule 78) with 1 him affixed. Visiting V_ him. Is the second pers. masc. plur. preter Kal. Ye (males) have visited. Is the third pers. fem. sing, preter Kal with D them masc. n changed into r>. Rule 83. She visited them^ (males.) Is the second pers. sing, preter Kal with D them masc. affixed. Thou hast visited them, (males.) 1 L Is the second pers. fem. plur. preter Kal. Ye, females, have visited. Is the third pers. fem. sing, preter Kal, n into n by rule 83. with j them fem. affixed. She visited them- females Is the second pers. sing, preter Kal, with j them fem, affixed. Thou hast visited them, females. E 34 13 «73; 40 ^2^^ 57 vnt 136 j;*nt 53 :it:;v 97 ^3 4 n^« 1 35 eddV 63 i;! 40 -|{i^J{ 58 yj^n 97 1^3 4 f^J^I 7 y-^J^n ^7 ^D ^4 I^Q 137 :nbDN*7 20 ;-\>;^^ 135 03^ 57 y»^t 136 y^^ 58 yv 59 ^-VQ 5 D^Dtt'n 93 j^ij; 97 ^2b^ 7 v-^xn n^ n^n 97 SdSi 3** 91 1^133 63 13 40 -JtJ^}^ 7 Yn^?^ 13 «?y 138 t:^^^ 97 «73«71 20 ♦nn 137 hSdnS 55 2m 139 pn^ 97 ^^ 4 rij^ 92 n»n 38 nc^j? 40 ntt^j< 97 *73 4 n^? 3 D^n'?^ 24 e<*»»i 44 jp 31 33 *ip2 20 »nn 32 ^-ny 20 ♦nn uo -jj^^ 26 :iij3 133 ;^^;^) 141 •♦{:;j:^n 30 DV 133. nJn behold. A particle from njn ^o 6e firesenc. Hither. So {H behold, or these. 134. "nnJ I have given. It is for "TinJ first, pers. sitvg. perf. Kal of pj to give. Vid. rule 108. "Is the first pers. plur. preter Kal. We have visited. Is the third pers. masc. sing, preter Kal with )2us affix- ed. He visited us. Or infin. Kal with 13 us. To visif mp3 -< us. Is the second pers. masc. sing, imperat. Kal, with U us. Visit thou., man, us. Or particip. Ben. Kal (Rule 78) "^ with U us. Visiting us. If the learner choose, he may enlarge this table for himself; but its necessity will be gradually superseded by a more familiar ac- (luaintance with the verbs-, and pronominal suffixes. 35 29 And God said, Behold, I have given you every herb bearing seed, which is upon the face of all the earth, and every tree, in the which is the fruit of a tree yielding seed, to you it shall be for meat. 30 And to every beast of the earth, and to every fowl of the air, and to every thing that creepeth upon the earth, wherein i/iere is life, / /lave given every green herb for meat; and it was so. 31 And God saw every thing that he had made, and, behold, it was very good. And the evening and the morning were the sixth day. 135. DdS to you. h to, and D3 pronominal suffix, second pers. plur. masc. Vide rule 37. So "jS to you, of'? and "]. Vide rule 36, as Dn*? num. 127. 136. ;?1I producing seed. Part. Benoni Kal ofi>"»T to sow, or product: seed. Vide rule 78. 137. rh^vh for meat. hfor. hSdn a noun fem. vide rule 16, from 'jDN to eat. 138. B'JDn creeping. Part. Benoni masc. Kal of tyoi to creep. 139. pT green. A noun adjective from DT to put forth leaves, also a leaf. 140. nxD very. From nK?3 strength. The superlative degree is made by adding this word or such like; by repeating a substantive, as a servant of servants; or the adjective, as good, good; by using the plural; or by adding the word God, as cedars of God. The compara- tive is also made by jD or D prefixed, as or compared with; or 3 among, as Blessed among women. 141. "'kJ'tyn the sixth. 7} the. ■'tS'B' an ordinal. Vide rule 168. From Vf& six, which is from lifWff to divide into six parts. See the table at num. 486. GENESIS II. 144 ^y) 143 :tD«n^f 97 ^31 8 y-j^jn^ 5 D^ntrn 142 ^^y^ i 40 -^ti^^ 146 '\n'D^bD 145 tytnirn 30 ovn 3 D^nS^ 2 97 «7p)3 145 ^yottfn 30 Dvn 147 ]-i2c^n 38 nt:^57 4 HK 3 D'nSi^ 103 "^•i^n 38 tntr^j? 40 -i^j^^^ ue ^hd^Sd 5 63 ^2 25 »3 149 1]-)^ 148 t:?1p»1 145 '>'$^^\^r\ 30 QV 3 C3»n*?K 2 {^11 40 -ijj;^ 146 inDxSo 97 ^DD 147 nnt2^ 142. iSdm ./^nrf or ^Aws werejimshed.') convers. iSd"* for in'?^'' 3d pers, plur. masc. Niphal of nb^ tojinish. Vide rule 102. and num. 67, in the note. 143. DN3lf the host of them. D plur. suffix, 3d person. Vide rule 40. ^3X is the root, an armijy or to assemdle. The suffix relates to the hea- vens and the earth, which were marshalled in beautiful array in the vast expanse. President Edwards supposed the angels were here intended, who are called God's host; but the plural niN3V is then ge- rally used. See DX3X in Neh. ix. 6. Psa. jcxxiii. 6. Isa. xxxiv. 4. xl. 36. xlv. 12. 144. Sd'I and he ended. 1 convers. Sd' for nSo' the third pers. sing, masc. Kal ofnSD. Vide rule 102. num. 142. 145. "'i^'atyn the seventh.* n emphatic. y'2\i^ the ordinal. Vide rule 168. Yrom }?2\i/ seven. Num.486. * The first 'i'''2KTi in the second verse is wanting in two of Dr. Kennicott's codices; in another it seems to be ^w^T); it is also the sixth in the Samaritan, and Syriac versions; and the Septuagint read £x1»j. Yet the common reading will make the same sense, as the se- venth day began with what we now would denominate the evening of the sixth, if the labour then terminated, 37 GENES18 11 1 THUS the heavens and the earth were finished, and all the host «f them. 2 And on the seventh day, God ended his work which he had made ; and he rested on the seventh day from all his work, which he had made. 3 And God blessed the seventh day, and sanctified it; because that in it he had rested from all his work, which God created and made. 146. inDJ^bn his work. 1 a suffix 3d pers. sing. Vide rule 39. n for n, because in construction before 1. Vide rule 24. HDJ^Sd worX', an agent, angel, Sec. D formative. "jN*? not used, to employ. 147. 7)21^^^ and he rested. 1 convera. 3d pers. sing. masc. fut. Kal of naB? tarnish, the sabbath, 148. B'^p''1 and he sanctified. 1 convers. »np' 3d pers. masc. sing, fut. Kal of E^lp to set apart to a higher or sacred use. in is suffixed Exod. XX. 11. Vide rule 39. t^np is a part, noun, holy. The God of nature has set apart to a holy use one day in seven of our time from the creation. 149. WN it. From AN. Vid. num. 4, and 1 pronom. suffix, sing, masc. 3d pers. Vide rule 39. Num. 85. Num. 63, in note. 150. r\)W}h/rom. or in making them.-\ S prefixed. Vide rule 175. It is the regular infinitive of a verb in Lamed He. Vide rules 103, 140. From nay to make. t Verbs in the infinitive are frequently used in the sense of En- glish verbal nouns, ending in ing. Vide num. 19. 38 20 j^'>;-\i 157 D-^o '56 nntrn 155 n»t2^ ^^ «73i . irD^nm 5 158 nav» 157 D-jo 156 n-!t:tn 55 :ittf57 97 ^y\ s y-^t^i 8 v")«n 13 Sy 3 a>n'7t« 154 rr\r\'> i^o "i^DiDn 159 «S 25 ♦o 163 -rt^i 115 :nDi«n ^ n« 1^2 ^^vh i^i |»« n^ b^^^^ e 14 t^Q 97 «73 4 n« 166 npt^m 7 v"^«n 1^5 p i64 n*7y» 151. nSx ^Ae«e, is a plural pronoun. This and ^/w^ are usually made in the Hebrew by HN, n, nxr, ni, Hi, and »Sn; ?/je*e and those, by nSx, Sn, non, on, and p; as mbin nSx rAese are ^Ae genermtions, '12 rh^ these are the sons. These words are termed in some grammars the demonstrative pronouns. The relatives are "li^N who, which, what, &c. (vide num. 40) and \o, which is probably a contraction of iiyx, and is found prefixed to nouns, pronouns, verbs, &c. and is translated by who, which, whom, that, &c. The interrogatives are "D and HD, who^ and what. Sk is used ten times in the Old Testament as a plural, these or those, never in the singular. It is probably a contraction for nSx, which is often used, and variously rendered in the common version, as a relative, an adjective, and a primitive pronounj these, those, like, such, them, &c. Sn is sometimes rendered as an article, as in Psa. ii. 7. Vide also num. 47. 152. nnSin generatioyts. A plur. noun from nV to breed. Rule 189. Hence ^S^ a son, mV a girl, rn'?10 offspring. 153. DN'^^nn in the creating thevi^ 3 in. n the. X13 infin. or participle Benoni Kal. Vide num. 2. Uthem. Vide rule 40. 154. TWrv Jehovah. From mn to subsist, in the part. Benoni, and TC which is perhaps an abbreviation of riTl'' or TT' the third pers. sing, fut. of rrn to be, and signifies the Essence, and so nirr' is the Essence subsisting of himself . But some suppose ' to be formative, and the root mn to be. Ens quod a se est, erat, et in aeternum manebit idem. 155. n't!' a shrub. A fem. noun from XW to be humble. Vide rule 1 65 for the "• formative. 156. mi?n the field, n the, and miy afield, a cu/ibearer, to shedy or pour forth. 39 4 These are the generations of the heavens and of the earth when they were created, in the day that the Lord God made the earth and the heavens. 5 And every plant of the field, before it was in the earth, and every herb of the field before it grew; for the Lord God had not caused it. to rain upon the earth, and there was not a man to till the ground. 6 But there went up a mist from the earth, and watered the whole face of the ground. 157. DID before, or not yet. This word is of uncertain derivation, but of frequent use; it is rendered before, yet, ere, not yet, (D-lOn Exod. X. 7.) and is also prefixed by 2 and 0. The obvious design of the term in this place, is to express that every plant and herb was formed perfect in the first instance, and did not grow up to maturity from the ground, either by a rapid or tardy growth; so that when man was formed, in a mature state, he found every thing prepared for him. The wisdom and power exercised in such immediate production were perhaps not greater than would have been necessary through the intervention of mediate causes. 158. noX" it grew. 3d pers. sing. masc. fut. Kal of POX to bud or sfiring- ufi. 159. kS not, from HnS to be nveary, or fail. As a noun it is put for nothing. 160. TDon caused it to rain. 3d pers. sing. masc. pret. Hiph. of *1J!3D to rain. leLj^Xwor. From JK labour, or to be weary. |'K is also no^///n^, none, no, neither, ivithout, it is gone. 162. '}2yh to cultivate. S vid. rule 142. n^i? infin. Kal, to obey ov serve, to till the earth. Vide num. 476. 423. 427. n3;? is also a ser- vant, subject, soldier, or ivot'shififier. 163. 1K1 and vapour. 1 convers. IN or TN from m' to send forth, with a formative «. 164. rby ivent ufi. 3d pers. masc. sing. fut. Kal of nS;' to ascend. 165. |D or 'It:) from. A particle from HJD to distnbute. Vid. num. 594. 166. npBTil and watered. 1 conjunctive. Vide note on num. 19. nptyn is the 3d pers. masc. sing. pret. in Hiphil, the ' is omitted. Vidie ntle 8 1 . From npiy to water. 40 Il7C)'^^*n4n« 3o»nSt« ^54nin» i67'^\jmt \\5 :nbn«n '^ 175 yton 174 :n^n i^s ti^tjiV ii^ o^txn 20 tn^i 172 o^n s 179 CDtrn 178 D-]p^ 177 py2 176 ^ 3 CD»nb« ^^4 HIH* 158 HD^^n 167 nr;» 40 ntrt* ii7 Es-i;«n ^ n« 179 dis; § 58 ^y 97 »73 115 n»n«n 165 p 3 tD'rh^ 1^4 nin» 172 D»»nn58 vvi i37'72«;::»7 ^^y\^^ isi n«"iD^ isoiism 184 nm^ i83:m26:iito i82n37'in 58 xvi i76 pn se^jmi i® !87 )o^f2^ 176 pn 4 rifc* 186 nipti^nS 177 pyo 135 «\t» 167. 1V"1 and formed. 1 conversive. IX" is the 3d pers. masc. sing, iul. Kal of IX"' to fas/lion. Verbs in Pe Jod perhaps never form the third pers. sing. fut. in Kal with the double ' but in Hiphil they do. Buxtorf cites this place and Psa. cxxxviii. 6. 168. 13;? dust. As a verb, to cover with dust; IBJ? is also earth, ^noriar^ rubbish, a youn^ roe. nii3J? lead. 1 69. nS'l and he breathed. 1 conjunctive. nS' is the third pers. masc. sing. pret. Kal, and the root, to breathe. 170. V3X3 into his nostrils. !) in. 1 his. Vide rule 39. "'iJK in construc- tion for D''i)X, vide rule 25, before 1. It is the plural of ^N the nose, or heatf from n3X to heat. 171.^0^^^ the breath of. In construct, n for n. Rule 26. Qm to breathe, is the root; hence nntyj breath, the soul. 172. D""!! lives, viz. animal and rational. The plural of 'n life, from rrn to live. 173. W2:h in a soul, or breathing frame. S in. 1^33 is the root also, ti breathe. Vide num. 91. 174. rrn living. The participle Benoni Kalofn'n to live. 175. ;?D'1 and ftlanted. 1 convers. jJt^"" for;'Or. Vide rule 94. Fut. 3d pers. masc. sing. Kal, of J,»D3 to plant. 176. p a garden, from p to protect. Hence pD a shield. HJJD sorront. Lam. iii. 65. 177. pyil in Eden. 3 in. ]n,]} as a noun is Eden, pleasure, &c. As a 41 7 And the Lord God formed man of the dust of the ground, and breathed into his nostrils the breath of life; and man became a living soul. 8 And the Lord God planted a garden eastward in Eden, and there he put the man whom he had formed. 9 And out of the ground made the Lord God to grow every tree that is pleasant to the sight and good for food; the tree of life also in the midst of the garden, and the tree of knowledge of good and evil. 10 And a river went out of Eden to water the garden, and from thence it was parted; and became into four heads. verb it occurs once only, and that in Hithp. (o delight^ ov please. Neh. ix. 25. Udyan in Sanscrit signifies, it is said, a garden. 178. DlpDyro7n or in the East, "dfrom. DID the east, nmp the same. D"'np eastward or the east wind. The root is D^p to go be/ore, prevent^ and to meet; and signifies also, as a noun, antiquity^ eternity, ancient times, past; as a particle, before, aforetime, and of old. It has been thus rendered; " And the Lord God planted a garden in Eden beyond Kedem." 179. Dty'l and he placed. ) convers. W^ is the third pers. masc.sing. fut. Kal of DB? to place. Vide rule 99. DB' is also a particle, there. 180. IDTM desired. Part. Benoni Niphal ofnon to desire. 181. riNlDSro the sight, h to. TMCin sight. D formative. nxiDisfrom nxi to see. 182. n;?in knowledge, n emphat. }^y^^ is in construction before 31£3. The noun is T\}?'\ knowledge. The root is pT to know. Vide rule 200. j;n opinion. p']D science, thought. 183. ;'*11 and evil. 1 and. ];^ evil; as a verb, to do evil, or to break. Kt3n is unintentional error, JIJ? iniquity designed and chosen, flowing from an evil heart, mo or T^D rebellion, provocation, pii/B apostasy, or tonspiracy. Vide num. 836. 184. nnJI arid a river. 1 and. 1713 a river, plur. onnJ and nnnJ. As a Tcrb, to flow. 185. ^T went out, is itself the root. Hence rriNVlD his goings forth. 186. nipiynV/or the watering, hfor. H emphatic. nipC is the infini- tive of Kal of Hpiy. Rule 103. Vide num. 166. 187. DB^Dl and from thence. 1 and. nfrom. andDty to place. Vide num. 179. F 42 ^ V'^'^n 1P5 :inn '^^ jnnrn '''^ Dt»^ 4o-)t»,»^ 194 nSnnn 12 66 ♦tt^»»7trn '«'^nn:n '90 Dt^^i 20^' w^:i ^ v»J* ^^ *73 * nt? ^^' 204 -^115^5^ 203 |-)^-|p 202 -j«7nn »92 ^^n 201 i^p-jn 154 n^n» 206 npn 205 tn'^c) 192 ^m ^s ♦y^nnn 134 -^n:ni i* 208 nnnyS i^^ pn 207 ^nmn ■ '^ ctxn 4 n« 3 D»nSi< 188. TlS" 7Da« fiarted. Fut. Niphal 3d pers. masc. sing, from "5"i3 ?o divide. It is of the past sense converted by 1 in Qiyoi. Num. 19. 189. nj^DlxS in four, h in. nj^jnx a noun, ybttr, from ^2"^ to quadrate. Vid. num. 88. 486. 190. DB' ?Ae name, plur. niDiy, from Diy to put^oY filace. Vide num. 179. rule 99. 191. jWD Pison. It is perhaps from ntya fo sfiread, or tflS ?o ^row big. It has been supposed to be the Little Indusy JViiab, or Mia Ganga. 192. Nin he, she, it, or that. From Nin the same as mn to be. And so NT) the same as TTTi. 193. 32Dn surrounding. H emphat. 33D or 331D is the participle Ben. Kal of 33D to com/iass. 194. nHmn Havilah. From the son of Cush, Gen. x. 7. S'H signi- fies /!af« from Sn, or strength from Sn' ^o oAzrfe. 195. ^nrn gold, n emphat. and 2ni gold; also c/ecr or bright. And vide Job xxxvii. 22. 196. nSnan Bdellium, n emphat. Perhaps from Sl3 ro aefiarate, and n^ smooth, or S"i3 fzw. If the name is taken from its sparkling light, and not its malleability, the Talmudists may be right, who deem it a pearl. Vide Num. xi. 7. It is rendered by some crystal. 197. j3« a stone. From ri33 to build^ H being formative; vide rule U7. 43 1 1 The name of the first is Pison; that is it which compasseth the whole land of Havilah, where there is gold; 1 2 And the gold of that land is good, there is bdellium and the onyx stone. 13 And the name of the second river is Gihon; the same is it that compasseth the whole land of Ethiopia. 14 And the name of the third river is Hiddekel; that is it which go- eth toward the East of Assyria. And the fourth river is Euphrates. 15 And the Lord God took the man, and put him into the garden of Eden, to dress it, and to keep it. 198. DTlwn the onyx. H emphat. Dnty has been thought an onyXy emerald, sardonyx, and lafiis lazuli. Exod. xxv. 7. 199. pn'J Gihon. It has been thought, the Araxes, the western Oxus, and formerly the confluence of the Tigris and Euphrates, &c. 200. m2 Cush. Gen. x. 6. Ethiopia, a name not confined to Africa, it means also a part of Arabia. But the north of India is perhaps here intended which is in Sanscrit the continent of Cush. 201. Spnn Hiddekel. Vide Daniel x. 4. The Tigris. Others think it was the Bahlac, or eastern branch of the Oxus. 202. iSnn going, n emphat. "pTi part. Ben. Kal, from iSn to go. 203. noip the east of, for nmp, in construct. Vide rule 26. Vide num. 178. 204. nii5?s Assyria. Vide Gen. x. 11, 12. Seated by Asher, the son of Shem. The root is "ityx to be hap.}iy, 205. ni3 Peret, Phrat, mDNIH Euphrates, Fertility, from Tr\ti to produce. It is thought to be the Phrath, Ferah, or Hermund. 206. npM and took. 1 convers. np'' for npS\ 3d pers. masc. sing. fut. Kal of npS to take. Vide rule 200. 93. 207. innn and he placed him. \ convers. ) him. Rule 39. nnr 3d pers. sing. masc. fut. Kal of nr,J to set, or place. 208. m-zyh to cultivate it. S prefix. D it. Vide rule 39. 13;? infin, Kal, to serve. Postea n3;?n 2d pers. sing. fut. Kal. 209. nirDt;bl to keep it. 1 and. S te. n it. Rule 39. lOBf infin, Kal to luatch, or guard. 211 tbD^n 21^ h.^ 176 pT 58 ^y 97 SDO 19 -))3«S 211 'j^J^n 159 t^^ 18- y*^T 56 :i^J3 182 j-|y*|n 58 ^J^OI 1^ 214 P1J3 212 ^i^JO 213 ^jt^^JJ^ 3u QVl 25*3 212 l^JJ^ 36 nito 159 ^{t, 3 tr»nV>e 1 '4 mn» 19 -^ok*^ 214 jnion is 219 nry ^^mS 2l^■^try^< ^^i^nnS ll7Dl^?^ 215 nvn 115 rif:ii4 n^H 97 ^2 29 Kip^ 223 HD 222 J^M^-b ^^^ Olf^H ^7 ^^ 221 J^^^ 173 {J^tj^ 117 Dl^n 218 l^? 29 f^'^pt 40 ^^^ 97 »721218 l^y 210. iri ancf commanded. 1 convers. ir for nir the 3d pers. masc. sing. fut. Kal of niv to command. Vide rule 102. 211. 'iDH eating: Part. Ben. Kal, and SoNn is the 2d pers. sing, masc. fut. Kal of Sjn to eat. Rule 143. 212. IJnD/rom it. 1 it. Rule 39. p/rom, with a n prefix. So njDD and JDD. Rules 39 and 34. and vide num. 526 and 594. 2 IS. -jSoK t/iy eating. ^DH is the part. Ben. Kal. Vide num. 211.-] is a pron. suffix; vide rule 36. 214. mn dying. Part. Ben. Kal. nion is the 2d pers. masc. sing. fut. Kal of mo or no to die. Num. 853. niD does not always import tempo- ral death. Vide 1 Sam. xxv. 37. Prov. xix. 18. and Prov. xii. 28. As life may mean either happiness, or animal, spiritual, or eternal lifej so death has as many senses directly opposed to these. Its meaning in this place must be collected from the nature of the life, which it would destroy. Man was constituted holy, death implies sin; he was in a state of friendship with God, death implies enmity against him; he enjoyed every production of the earth which tended to his com- fort, death implies that the earth should be embittered to him; he enjoyed peace, death implies that his state should be that of a war- fare; he enjoyed health, death implies that he should be subjected to diseases; in a word, as without sinning he was to be free from death, that is everlastingly happy, death implies everlasting misery. 45 16 And the Lord God commanded the man, saying, of every tree of the garden thou mayest freely eat; 17 But of the tree of the knowledge of good and evil thou shalt not eat of it; for in the day that thou eatest thereof thou shalt surely die. 18 And the Lord God said, it is not good that the man should be alone; I will make him an help meet for him. 19 And out of the ground the Lord God formed every beast of the field, and every fowl of the air, and brought them to Adam, to see what he would call them: and whatsoever Adam called every living creature, that ivas the name thereof. But the gift of a seed of the woman, who should restore the honour of a broken law, was, at the moment of denouncing this commination, as much on the divine mind as it was afterwards. He is therefore the end or scope of the law for righteousness; and justice can have no claim on those, to whom grace was promised and given in Him before the world began. 215. r\rn being. The infinitive of verbs in Lamed He change n in- to ni. Vide rules 103, 140. Of H'H to be. Vide page 29 ante. 216. nnS alone by himself. ^ pron. suff. Vide rule 39. 13^7 alone, a particle, from S pref. and nj alone. 217. ntyjrx I will make. It is the first pers. sing. fut. Kal of na';; to make. Vide num. 116. 218. 'hfor him. hfor. 1 him, pron. suffix. 3d pers. masc. Vide rule 39. 219. "^Tjr aid or helfi. It is also the root, to helfi. 220. nJ33 as before him. D as. HJJ before. As a verb, to shono oneself. 1 him. Vide rule 39. nJ3 before him. nJjS over against him. nJJD out of his sight. Joshua vi. 5. v. 13. Psal. x. 5. 221. iiy) and he brought. ) convers. N3'' is the 3d pers. sing. masc. fut. Hiphil of the verb N*3 to come. The characteristic "• is omitted- Rule 81. 222. PMrh to see. h to. niXT infin. Kal of nxT to see. Vide rule 103, 142. 223. nn ivho, which, what, how, wherefore. It is used often after the prefijces. Hence 'D who. 324 r\yn^ 1 1^ ei^^n 29 j^npn 224 j^j^^f 192 ^^n 174 n»n 20 114 n»n '7 "^D*?*! ^^ Dr!:trn 93 f^^^;^) \ 12 nonin '^^ ^^S 220 jnjiD ' "'D 240 Q^J? 239 243 224. nK' the name of it. 1 z7. Vid. Rule 39. DB'. Vide num. 190. Hence nnK/, plur. moB'. 225. KXD he found. It is the third pers. masc. sing. pret. Kal, to find. 226. Sd'I awe? caused to fall. 1 convers. Ss' for Ssr is the 3d pers, sing. fut. Hiphil, from the root ^£33 to fall. Being a verb in Pe Nun^ it drops J in the future. Vide rules 94 and 8 1. nSsi is the fern, partici- ple Benoni. Gen. xv. 12. 227. noinn a dee/i slee/i. A fern, noun from D^^ to shut up. in sleep, n is formative. Rule 189. Gen. xv. 12. 228. ity"l and he slept. 1 convers. ja?" is the third pers, sing. masc. fut. Kal of \W to sleep. Rule 85, Rather, And caused him to sleepy in Hiph. Vide num. 167. and rule 81. 229. np'i and he took. 1 convers. np' for npV. Vide rule 200. 93. From np7 to take. 230. nriN one. A fern, noun for mnx. Masc. is nriN one. Num. 486. s formative. From "WV to unite. 23 1. rn;?Syo of his ribs. D prefix. 1 suffix. Rule 39. ' is added because in construction to a fem. plur. in n. Vide rule 27. }h^ plur. n;'*7:f the side. " Flesh of my flesh" proves that more than a rib was taken. Vide Exod. xxv. 12. xxvi. 26, 7. xxxvi. 31, Sec. 232. n:DM and he closed up. 1 gonvers. "IJO' is the third pers. sing- masc. fut. Kal "»JD to shut up. 47 20 And Adam gave names to all cattle, and to the fowl of the air, and to every beast of the field: but for Adam there was not found an help meet for him. 2 1 And the Lord God caused a deep sleep to fall upon Adam, and he slept; and he took one of his ribs, and closed up the flesh instead thereof. 22 And the rib, which the Lord God had taken from man, made he a woman, and brought her unto the man. 23 And Adam said. This is now bone of my bones, and flesh of my flesh; she shall be called woman, because she was taken out of man. 233. -W2 flesh. As a root, to spread. " Thou hast clothed me with —flesh." 234. runnn instead of it. T\T\T\ instead^ from nn3 to descend. Rule 189. And nJ. Vide rule 39. 235. p'l and builded. 1 convers. \y for T\iy is the 3d pers. masc. sing. fut. Kal of nJ3 to build. Vide rule 102. 236. ntyxS a ivoman. S for Sn the. ni^K a female t^X, a ivoman, from Itf'H and so from HB'"' to be. Vide num. 278. 237. nN3'l and caused her to come. 1 convers. n pron. suffix. Vide Rule 39. Xi' is the 3d pers. masc. sing. fut. Hiphil of the root K3 to come. Vide num. 221. 238. nxi this. The same as with a n. nni fem. from PIT this. Num. 306. 239. DJ^an turn. 71 emphat. and D^'D turn^ a noun. Or as an adverb, now. The other creatures were not fit to be associated with man, » This turn is bone" &c. 240. d:;;; a bone. As a root it signifies to be strong. 241. "'DV;?0 of my bone. D is a prefix. ' final is my. Vide rule 34. The word DX;r is perhaps for D'nx;r. The D"' is omitted in this manner, the D because it is in construction before ', vide rules 24, 25, and the "^ of the plural is dropped before, or coalesces with, "• the suffix. Rule 34 in note. HD^jr plur. moify. Hence 'niDX;? ?ny bones. 242. niy3D of my flesh. D prefix/ro7«. " my. Rule 34. ^Wl the inte- ^uments. As a root, to spread. Num. 233. 343. J^np" shall be called. It is the 3d pers. masc. sing. fut. Niph. of 48 24 245 p IS •yy 238 tnt^t 244 ;-]Y^^^ 236 ^^^J^ 25 ^ 236 ^^\^ 250 p^-ll 249 1)3t« 4 n^^ 247 y^^ ^ f J{ 236 ^^^ 246 2T3?» 252 vnn 34 :*^^^? 242 -^t^:!*? '252 vnn 251 intr^t^i 2s 159 «»7^ 251 "injr^i U7 on«n 254 d^di-iv 253 dp^u^ 255 ntj^c^an* Kn ?o ca//. nx? is fem. This is tee fore an exception from the agree- ment of a verb with its nominative. Rule 127. Vide num. 67 in note. Or it is here in Kal. 244. nnpS mas taken. Is the 3d pers. sing. fem. pret. Kal, in which it has sometimes the active and sometimes the passive sense. Rule 86. num.229. 245. p h]; therefore, p so, as a root to prepare, p hS in nowise. 'J3 p Sy because, since. Vide num. 44. 246. Di;^' shall leave. It is the 3d pers. masc. sing, fut. Kal of 31^' tojbrsake. 247. r3N his father. 1 his. Vide rule 39. 3K is more rarely used than '3N a father, which is its constant form in construction, and in the plural nnN, vide rule 23, possibly to distinguish it from DON green fruits. From n2N to acquiesce. Vide num. 432, 669. * The Samaritan Pent, reads here DH'JB'O, the Septuag. ei 'hvt, the Vulgate," et erunt duo," &c. The Syriac and Arabic also agree. And vide Mat. xix. 5. Mark x. 8. 1 Cor. vi. 16. and Eph. v. 31. Thus is it a prohibition of polygamy. 49 24 Therefore shall a man leave his faiher and his molhei', and shall cleave unto his wile, and they shall be one flesh. 25 And they were both naked, the man, and his wife, and were net ashamed. 249. ):2H Ms mother. ) his. Rule 39. Postea 'DN my mother. DX a mo- ther. As a root, to supfiort. 250. p3ni and shall cleave. 1 convers. Vide rule 139. num. 19, n. p3T is the 3d pers. masc. sing. pret. Kal, to cleave unto. 251. ini^Nn unto his ivife. 3 prefix. 1 his. Rule 39, n"^N in construc- tion before 1 for H'ti'X. Vide num. 236. 3 is here used as it is in Deut. XV. 2. Eccl. ii. 24. which places as plainly show that it is the sign of the dative, as others can that it designates an ablative. Hence an ar- gument arises against the distinction of cases in Hebrew. 252. rn'1 and they shall be. 1 conjunct. Vrv for iriTf 3d pers. masc. plur. fut. Kal, of rrn to be. Vide page 29 in note. 253. ur\'l\i} they both. For 'W two, vide num. 45. 436. DH pron. suff. plur. 3d pers. Vide rule 40. 254. D'Dn;; naked. It is the plural of Dn;? naked, from Dl;? to be na- ked. ^55. y^^Li'^Pi" ashamed. It is the 3d pers. plur. masc. fut. Hithpael, W being doubled. Vide rule 109. The root is W^ to fag, or be con- founded. It has the sense of the prater because of the preceding: Vau. G 50 GENESIS III. 156 -^^^^ 114 n^n^r^DD '25rtD^1V 2on^n ssetj^n^ni ^ 159 f^«^ 3 D^nb'K 19 -|J3t< 25 »J 258 t^^ 236 HlT^n ^ 236 nt:;j^n 260 -j^xni '76 ^-^^^ ss yy 97 Sdd 259 iSd^d 2 259 jt^j^j^;, 176 '^^^^-^ 58 yy 59 ',>^QJ^ 256 f^'niH ^' S« 3 D^n'^x ^0 nox ' 76 ]jn -3^ linn 40 '•^^^ 58 ^yn 59 ♦-^qoi 3 218 1:1 26i lyjin 159 ^1^1 2i2 i;jJ2J3 259 ^^2^^ 159 ^^^ 236 ni!;«n 4^ ^^ 256 j^^nin ^^ nrjt^n 263 jpnon 262 ^ 4 256. B'njni and the serpent. 1 and. n emphat. KTIJ a serpent; and as a verb ;o We^y attentively. That the reader may satisfy himself whether lyriJ signifies in this instance an ape, all the places where the word oc- curs in the bible follow; Gen. iii. 1, 2. 4. 13, 14. xlix. 17. Exod. iv. 3. vii. 15. Num. xxi. 6, 7. 9,9. Deut viii. 15. 2 Kings,xviii. 4. Job xxvi. 13. Psal. Iviii. 4. cxl. 3. Prov. xxiii. 32. xxx. 19. Eccles. x. 8. 1 1. Isa. xiv. 29. xxvii. 1, 1. Ixv. 25. Jer. viii. 17. xlvi. 22. Amos v. 19. ix. 3. and IVlic. vii. 17. After these have been examined, the word e^<5 must be tried; and the fourteen places in which it occurs in the New Testament, tested by their respective contexts. 357. dp;? nvise. From Di;; to be naked. A state of preparedness for the exercise of the body. Applied to the mind, it imports vigorous application, or intense thought. 258. t^N verily. As a noun anger, n2N to heat. "D f|N Is it certain that? or therefore. Perhaps nSN to bake, ^1'^ to be angry, and this •word ']J< are wholly distinct, and the word ^^X anger may come from It has been thought that only tfhe conclusion of Satan's address is here recorded; the same form of speech often occurs, as Neh. ix. 18. 1 Sam. xxiv. 30. 2 Sam. iv. 11. Prov. xv. 11. xxi. 27. Ezek. xiv. 21. 51 GENESIS III. 1 NOW the serpent was more subtile than any beast of the field, which the Lord God had made. And he said unto the woman, Yea, hath God said, Ye shall not eat of every tree of the garden? 2 And the woman said unto the serpent, we may eat of the fruit of the trees of the garden: 3 But of the fruit of the tree which is in the mid':t of the garden, God hath said, Ye shall not eat of it, neither shall ye touch it, lest ye die. 4 And the serpent said unto the woman, Ye shall not surely die: XV. 5, Sec. and generally follows something else. But this receives little confirmation from the woman's not discovering surprise. Being lately formed and all things new to her, scarcely any occurrence could produce this; and being innocent she could neither fear, nor suspect danger. 259. iSdnh ye shall cat, is the 2d pers. masc. plur. fut. Kal of Sl^N, Postea SjnJ is the 1 st pers. plur. fut. Kal. 260. "loxni and she said. 1 convers. "IDNH is the 3d pers. fern. sing, fut. Kal of nox to sfieak. 261. i;rjn shall ye touch. 2d pers. masc. plur. fut. Kal of ;'J3 to touch. Vide rule 94. This addition, " Neither shall ye touch it," Avas fairly implied in the divine prohibition, which must have included, both the indulged desire of the thing prohibited, and all tampering with te^aptation. But, as the precept was given to Adam before the woman was formed, she was interdicted only in him; and it is very pos- sible that Adam, when instructing her in this matter, might caution her against touching the fruit, which she would naturally connect with the prohibition itself. 262. |3 lest. A doubtful state of mind, from 'T\'^i^ to turn. 263. pn*3n ye shall die. | is paragogic. Vide rule 85 b. IHDn is for imon, vide rule 98, and is the 2d pers. masc. plur, fut. Kal of the verb mo or n*: to die. Vide num. 214. 52 25 »3 3 D»nS>* 264 yiV 25 ^ 263 t\^nt2n 214 niD 159 t{»7 5 267 DD^ry 266 ^npDiT 2 12li»:)»3 265 D^^DJ* ^^ QVl 183 jy-^1 26 21D 26-' ♦JJTV 3 * D^nb^?3 268 QH^^m 271 '^DNL^ 58 YVn 26 ;21D 25 »5 236 ntC^XH 270 {^-^^1 ^ 58 yyn 180 -jon^i 267 c^yy'^ 19'^ «in272 n'it^n25 01 276 ^nm 211 b^xni 275 vnDo 274 npm 2:. V^trnb 280 n:)np2n"i 259 :»:»2xn 279 nov 278 nt:^'^^ 277 dji r 264. ;7nr ?"« knowwg. Part. Ben. Kal ofj^T' ?o Xrnow. Some readi?1* here. 265. QdSdn your eating. UD pron. suff. 2d per. plur. Vide rule 37. hDH part. Ben. Kal. Rule 78, 266. inp3J1 the7i shall be ofiened. 1 the?!, conversive. Num. 19. n. inpQJ the 3d pers. masc. plur. pret. Niphal of the verb np3 lo ofien. 267. QD'iy yo7ir eyes. UD pron. suff. 2d pers. plur. Vide rule 37. ^iy in regim. vide rule 25, for a^iy eyes plur. of p;' aneycy a fountain. It is often feminine. From nj;? to turn back. 268. Dn""ni and ye shall be. 1 conversive. Dn"n is for Dnn'n,n being changed into \ Vide rule 102. It-is the 2d pers. plur. masc. pret. Kal of n'n to be. Vide page 29, n. 269. y-\v knowing^ for D >nr in construct, (some read •;^T') Vide rule 25. Part. Ben. Kal plur. of the verb^'T to know, yv they knew, verse 7, is the 3d pers. masc. plur. fut. Kal. Gen. xv. 13. i^li) pT knowing- thou shalt know, that is, thou shalt certainly or surely know. See the same idiom Gen. ii. 17. Dijing thou shalt die, that is, sw^f/j/ c?z>. Ver. 16. Eating thou shalt eat, thou shalt freely eat. Gen. iii. 1 6. Multijilying I will multifily, \h^\.'\^ greatly multijdy. Vide rule 143. * The common translation of D'nSxD as gods is unv.-arranted. The word UK'ha had not occurred in such sense in this or either of the former chapters; nor can it be inferred from the residue of the words of Satan, that he meant to communicate on this subject an idea. ^vhich the woman had never heard of before. 53 5 For God doth know, that in the day ye eat thereof, then your eyes shall be opened; and ye shall be as God knowhig good and evil. 6 And when the woman saw that the tree was good for food, and that it was pleasant to the eyes, and a tree to be desired to make one wise, she took of the fruit thereof, and did eat; and gave also unto her husband with her, and he did eat. 270. N"'m and she saw. \ convers. Kin for DXin 3d pers. fem. sing, fut.ofnx-). Rule 102. 271. SDNoS/or/oorf. hfor. Sdkd a noun, /oor/. Of D formative, and *70N to eat. 272. nixn an object of desire. From mx to covet, with n formative. Rule 189. 273. SoiynH to mature the under standitig. h pref. Soari infin. Hiphii «f Sjb? to perfect. 274. npm and she took. 1 conv. npn is the 3d pers. fem. sing. fut. Kal of npS. Vide rule 93. Its imperat. npS, np, and nnp, withn pa- ragogic. This verb frequently drops its first radical. 275. vnao of the fruit of it. mfrom. y suff. Rule 39. For ^"(3 vide num. 59. 276. inni and she gave. 1 conver. jnn for \TMT\. Rule 94. It is the 3d pers. fem. sing. fut. Kal of {HJ to give. 277. DJ also. It is said to signify abundance. Repeated it is ren- dered as well as. 278. nty'sS to her husbaTid. h to. T\ her. tif'H a man, from T]W' to he. Vf'H is a kind husband, h}!2 a severe husband. Vide num. 236. In ver. 17, "jnB'^? thy wife is the common occurrence of the possessive suffix, "] thy, because of Avhich the n final of ni^N is changed into D. Vide rule 26. 279. nn;^ with or near her. n her. Rule 39. Uj! with, in, against. As a noun, the fieo/ile. 280. runpsni and were opened. ) and convers. It is the od pers. fem. plur. fut. Kal ofnpfl to often. 54 282 on 281 tD»^^^y 25 1^ 269 »^yy) 253 * Qn^^tS^ 267 i}^y 3 tD'Thi^ >54 nM> 2 .9 «7ip I nx 288 lyotrn 287 :nn:in ® 291 Nannn ^o cdvh >6 nn*? »76 p^ 290 -]bnnD 3 Din'?;?^ '^^ mn^ 14 t ti^o 251 int^^Ni iJ^ oit^n 47'7« -D^nSx '54 n^n» 29 5<-)p>i 176 :pn 58 ^y 36 *|inn ^ 4 n« '3 n,:?^n 292 .pj^^j 218 ^^ i':>'io,n i»7 cn«n ^^ 28, CD-l^y 25 O 293 ^-^^^-j 176 p^ 288 '>r\VD^ 289 -^^^p 281. dot;? naked. It is the plur. of D1';?, vide rule 19, from Dl;? «e ie naked. Vide num. 257. 282. on theij. Vide rule 32. It is the plur. of NIH he, from H'H ^» ^e. Vide num. 61. n. 283. nan'l G«rf theij fastened together. 1 convers. nan' is the third pers. masc. plur. fut. Kal of i£)n to sew or /7ws;. This word occurs but in this place, in Job xvi. 15. Eccles. iii. 7. and in Ezek. xiii. 18. * Adam, it may be fairly presumed, was not present when the woman was tempted and ate. That her eyes were opened, immediate- ly upon her eating, to see her folly and sin, and the deception practi- sed upon her, is not asserted; to suppose this is to impeach her of a horrid, malignant attempt to ruin her husband, a crime not imputed to her. But it is hei'e expressly declared that upon his eating, the eyes of C'n'':w both of them were opened, they discerned an immediate loss of their innocence, peace, and happiness, and experienced a sense of guilt and misery. Thus does it appear, that as the precept was given to him alone, a representative of his race, she was brought into misery by his violation of it. Though the woman was frst in the transgression, it was by one man's disobedience that sin and death have come into the world. t If ^lp be here thunder, and nn a wind in the evening, and the Almighty had even spoken to them as at Sinai to Israel, yet if innocent they had nothing to fear; the effort to conceal themselves is there- fore a plain proof both of ignorance and guilt. 55 7 And the eyes of them both were opened, and they knew that they were naked, and they sewed fig leaves together, and made themselves aprons. 8 And they heard the voice of the Lord God walking in the garden in the cool of the day: and Adam and his wife hid themselves from the presence of the Lord God among the trees of the garden. 9 And the Lord God called unto Adam, and said unto him, Where art thou? 10 And he said, I heard thy voice in the garden, and I was afraid., because 1 was naked, and I hid myself. and seems not necessarily to imply in any of the places a sewing with a needle; but some species of fastening or connecting together. It is probable that girdles were formed by twisting together the stems, whilst the leaves remained pendent; they fastened together the Jig-leaf. 284. nS;; a leaf. From nSjr to ascend. Many both of Kennicotfs and De Rossi's codices read "h],' here instead of nSi% and 'V occurs in regimine in other passages, as Ezek. xvii. 7. Neh. viii. 15. 285. n3Xny?jf, an adjective. As a noun it signifies the tree, ov fruity plur. nJNn and D'Jwn. Perhaps from |X labour. 286. W^''^ and they made. 1 conver. It is the 3d per. masc. plur. fut. Kal oirmv- Vide rule 102. 287. n-ijn girdles. It is the plur. of rrijn. Vide rule 21. From IJn to gird or bind. 288. IJ^Diy'l and they heard. 1 conver. It is the 3d pers. masc. plur. fut. Kal of ;?OLy to hear. Postea pres. Kal, 1st per. Ti^'ocy. 289. '71p the voice. Or '?p from nSp to be light. Ver. 10, "^Sp thy voice. Sp with "] sulf. Vide rule 36. 290. iSnnD walking. It is the part. masc. Ben. Hithpael of ^Sn to nvalkt or wax. 291. X3nnM and he hid himself or they hid themselves. Rule 139. ) conver. It is the 3d pers. masc. sing. fut. Hith. of N3n to hide. 292. n3"X where art thou? "X where, and as a noun, a settlement. TO thou, pron. suff. Vide rule 36. 293. XTK1 and I feared. 1 converg. NTN is the first pers. sing. Kal 25 t3 155 -|«7 297 ^oy^ 296 i*^ ^^ ^f^^^] 295 tKim^l 294 O;)^ li 300 y^S'^'^ 4- -^;;»>j^ 58 yyn 299 p^ 298 p^J* 28! ^^^^ 19 -lOJ^^T 211 j;-,»;,jj^ 212 ^^J2t2 21! ^3S 301 i^b^h ^2 SOS ♦-j^^jr 302 nnni 40 -^jj^^ 236 nt^tj^j-, 117 c^.^n 205 :V:D^C1 58 y^;-^ 212 p 304 »t, 3„2 -j^p;, 192 J^^H 306 pf^t 296 HD -^36 nS^i^^ • tDTib^ 154 HIH^ 19 «^)2^»-| 13 30? ^^f^^ii^n 256 j^»njn 236 ntr^n -os nj:j^rii 307 jr\>\i;^ 256 ti'n^n 47 ^^ r. D»rib« 154 nin» 19 ^q{^»i 305 ;«73j<") u ■ ^2D 298 pp^ 310 -^inX 306 p5^| 307 p^Jj^j; 25 ♦J ^ l^m 13 ^y 156 p-jt:»n n^. p^p ^^ tei 112 p^nnn 97 of KT to fear. NT is often taken for sinful fear, and frequently also used to express a holy reverence, but never to signify shame, and yet this is the affection that wouid naturally spring from being naked. If no other nakedness was experienced than that in which the first parents had been created, they had nothing to fear. As a noun,/mr. 294. OJN /. O imports emphasis. 'JX 7, implies /ire««?nce. From rUK ta occur or Aa/i/ien. 295. «3n«1 and I hid. ) convers. NDHN is the first pcrs. sing. fut. K.al of N^n to hide. Vide num. 29). 296. "3 tvho.? ivhat? from HD, who, what, &c. Each of these words may be used interrogatively, or merely relatively. HI this, that, is a demonstrative pronoun. Num. 151. 297. I'jn declared. It is the 3d pers. masc. sing. pret. Hiphil of IIJ to show. Vide rule 94. num. 757. 298. nnx thou. From nnx to be firesent. Vide rule 31. 299. JDH whether, from H whether? Rule 152. ]i:i/rom. Num. 212, 300. ym): I have cojnmanded you. "] you. Rule 36. The first pers. siag. preter Kal ofcTCf. .? into ' vide rule 102. 301. '?nT7 to not. h to. vh^ not, unless, except . hi not, without. V; ?j«L From n^D to wear out. 57 1 1 And he said, Who told thee that thou wast naked? Hast thou eaten of the tree whereof I commanded thee that thou shouldest not eat? 12 And the man said, The woman, whom thou gavest to be with me, she gave me of the tree, and I did eat. 13 And the Lord God said unto the woman, What is this that thou hast done? And the woman said, the serpent beguiled me, and I did eat. 14 And the Lord God said unto the serpent. Because thou hast done this, thou art cursed above all cattle, and above every beast of the field: upon thy belly shalt thou go, and dust shalt thou eat all the days of thy life. 302. nnnJ thou gavest. n is paragogic. nnj is the 2d pers. sing, pret. Kal, for njnj. Vide rule 108. From \T\1 to give. T\lT\l is the 3d pers. sing. fem. Vide num. 374. 303. no;^ to be nvith or ?iear me. "< me. Vide rule 34. '^'0^ to standi or livey and as a particle, near., or ivith. 304. 'S to me. S prefixed. Vide rule 175. And "' me, a suffix, vide rule 34. So ""0 nvith me, Sec. "h is also through me. 305. Sdni and I ate. 1 convers. Sdn for Sdxx, vide rule 97. The 1st pers. sing. fut. Kal of Sdn to eat. 306. nxt this. As if r\nT from HT this, that, hither, here. Used as a particle, and as a pronoun. Num. 238. 307. n'iy;r hast thou done. It is for nnty;^ vide rule 102, the 2d pers. sing. pret. Kal oiTiV/y to do. 308. "roNni and she said. 1 convers. It is the third pers. fem. sing, fut. Kal of *1DN to sfieak. 309. 'lV,yn deceived me. "'J me. Vide rule 34. N^BTI for N'tyJH. Rule 94. The 3d pers. masc. sing. pret. Hiph. of XK'J to lift up,, bear, bear guilt, deceive, &c. 310. inx cursed. It is the participle Paoul Kal of 11J< to curse, burn, or consume with lightning. Fem. n"l1"iN, ver. 17. 311. "[Jnj thy belly. "] thy. Rule 36. \m to bow, and as a noun, the belly. Or from HJ to break forth. H 58 313 ♦•^♦♦n 18 ^»» 97 «73 211 ^3^n 168 ^fiVI 312 -jSd 28 ^»21 236 ntt^jen 28 ^T 316 "^^^ 315 H^JJ^K 314 PI^J?^ 15 1 J^^XI 318 -jfJIJif* 192 * ^in 317 ryn? 28 yy\ 317 -]ynt 19 -IDX 236 ntr^^n 47 »7i^ 320 l^pV 319 lifilt^rfl 298 HH^I 1^ 322n^;yn 323 -|i-,m 322 -j^inify 321 ^nn^f 321 r\2ir\ 192 J^IHT 326 ^npltrn 236 '^^^^ 47 t^l^") 325 Q^^:! 324 n^H 288 nv;::!^^ 25 ^3 19 -^ot? 117 mt^^i 323 j-j^ 327 ^^^i^o* 17 312. 'f>n shale thou go. For "^Vn, rule 89. It is the 2d pers. sing, masc. fut. Kal ofl^' to go. 313. "I^n thy life, "j fhy. Rule 36. D^'H a plur. noun, life. Here in construct. Rule 25. From PiTi to live, and /z/e, a fern. noun. 314. HTNI and enmity. 1 a7it/. Hj'K a fern, noun from 3'N to be an enemy, and as a noun, an enemy. 315. n'tyx I ivill place. First pers. sing. fut. Kal of n'B^ ^o place. 316. "^y^ between thee. From "j affix, and I"3. Num. 28. 317. ^^"IT Mz/ seed. "] suffix, ?/-!?/. >'ir need, and ^o so^y. n;?1I her seed. n suffix, Aej*. * As there is no neuter in Hebrew, (I have said p. 2 1, n.) it is often proper that the English of a masculine or feminine pronoun should be neuter when the antecedent is in the translation neuter; and there- fore wn referring to>''i< has been rendered it. Nevertheless as>n?means not any thing which is inanimate; and especially as the scriptures discover that Christ was meant, it is more proper to translate xin by He. Messiah was called the seed of the woman, not the man, because he was to be born of a virgin. And if the Saviour be meant by the Avord :"'t in the passage, i^N"* must not be confined to mean merely the head, but the power, not of the brute animal, but of the evil Spi- rit, who had thus made use of it for the purpose of deception; and who should be allowed as an instrument to bruise the heel of, or inflict a part of the curse incurred by man's sin upon, the conqueror of the enemy of man. 59 15 And I will put enmity between thee and the woman, and be- tween thy seed and her seed; it shall bruise thy head, and thou shalt bruise his heel. 16 Unto the woman he said, I will greatly multiply thy sorrow and thy conception; in sorrow thou slialt bring forth children; and thy desire nhaU be to thy husband, and he shall rule over thee. 318. "jDW shall bruise thij. "] thy. It is the 3d pers. masc. sing. fut. Kal of ""I'ly to bruise^ or crush. 319. IJDliyn shalt bruise his. i: his. Rule 39. f]iiynis the second pers. masc. sing. fut. Kal of •"jIU'. Our translators have rendered here in two instances the verbal affix as if a possessive, and suffixed to the follow- ing noun; in this they follow the Vulgate. Tremeliius has huic cal- caneum^ and tibi cafiut. It has been doubted whether a verbal affix be in any case a possessive pronoun, except when with an infinitive or participle. 320. ^p;? heel. It is a root, and signifies to press, to sufifilant. As a particle, because, inasmuch as. 321. nnin multiplying. H emphat. r^^2^ infin. Kal; or part. Ben. Kal. Vide num. 19. HDIX is the 1st pers. sing. fut. Kal. Hence y^ many. o22. "^jniV thy labour, "j thy. jUY;^ labour, travail. From ^"i}! to labour, 323. "jJini and thy gestation. "] thy. 1 and. pn or pin gestation, from mn to swell. 324. ^"ilTs thou shalt bring forth. It is the 2d pers. sing. fern. fut. Kal of nS'. It drops ' vide rule 89. iV signifies to bear, or to beget, and the masculine nb' in Gen. vi. 4, should have been rendered, be- gat to themselves children. Roffens. 325. D'JD sons. It is the plur. of p from nJ3 to build up. Postea"]J3l. 1 thy. p son, and 1 and. 'J^ my son. 326. "^npri^n thy desire. "] thy. n in regiminc for H. Vide rule 26. mpari from T>Ti'^ to desire earnestly. Rules 153. 189. 327. Siyo^ he shall govern. It is the 3d pers. sing. masc. fut. Kal of 7ii':D to rule. 328. p over thee^ 2 is a prefix; vide rule 148. "] is a possessive suffix of either the masculine or fern, gender; vide rule 36. 9 60 3ion-)n« 212-I3J2D211 SDi^n 159 {^«7 i9-|Ok'7 329 yr\'>'\'i 97«73 2ii ni*7D«n •'^22 pn\fyn 330 •^•^^^jy:! 115 hd^^"^ 135 -^S 333 n^D^n 332 -^-|-,*|«| 331 ^ip^ 313 t^H '« *D* ^^ 335 y^^ 334 nvrn ^^s i^^i^^n 55 ^{i^y 4 nK 21 1 n'^r^i ^^ 115 nDTj^n 47 '7^< 333 ^^ity 337 -^j? 336 tunS 211 Sdnh 47 «7{<1 298 nnX 168 -^C)y 25 ^^ 339 pHp*? 212 n^Q^ 25 »^ 190 Cty U7 tDli^n 243 J^-^p^T 340 J^lt^^n '^^ ^i^V 20 97 »73 249 CiJ^ 342 HH^H 1^2 ^1^ 25 »^ 341 HIH 251 int^^N* 329. yn-i:? I commaiided thee. ■] ?/;ec. 'H'l:; for 'nniif 1st pers. sing, pret. Kal of niy. Rule 102. 330.']ni2;.'3 on ijour account. -\ thy.-y^^y^ is termed a particle, because of. From 2 and "^i:;' to pass anvaij. But "^n;' seems rather a participial noun here, and also in Gen. xii. 13. 16.xviii. 26. 1 Sam. xxiii. 10, and Psal. cvi. 32. 331. I'lpl and thorns. 1 and. '(•Ip a noun from ]*p to wound. 332. 'y-\'^'\'\ and thistles. 1 and. "niT from m ^o ^-o abotit. Its seed is scattered abroad by the winds. 333. n'ni'n shall it jiroducc . It is the 3d pers. fem. sing. fut. Hiphil of nOi to bud. 334. ri;'a /« the sweat of. 3 in. n>'? for n;'I in construct. From ;'"' to exude. 335. ysx thy face, "j fhy. "DX for D'SX in construct, of ^^X. Vide num. 170, 336. DrS bread. From DhS /o eaf. A\so food, fruit, fesh, bread-corn. 337. V 2z/?/z7. As a noun,yM^M?77j/. 338. pliy t/owr return, "j yowr. Dlty is a noun, or the part. Ben. Kal of 3iy to return. 339. nnpS .VzoM wnsf ?rtA:<-n. It is the 2d pers. sing. pret. Kal of np^ to take. Rule 93. 340. D1l>n Shalt thou return. 2d pers. m. sing. fut. Kal of DB? to return. Rule 77. 98. 2\^r\ is the second person, and is a part of the malediction 61 17 And unto Adam he said, Because thou hast hearkened unto the voice of thy wife, and hast eaten of the tree of which I commanded thee saying, Thou shalt not eat of it; cursed is the ground for thy sake; in sorrow shalt thou eat o/it all the days of thy life: 18 Thorns also and thistles shall it bring forth to thee, and thou shalt eat the herb of the field. 19 In the sweat of thy face shalt thou eat bread till thou return unto the ground, for out of it wast thou taken; for dust thou art, and unto dust shalt thou return. 20 And Adam called his wife's name Eve; because she was the mo- ther of all living. pronounced on Adam; but it embraced Eve; for otherwise death not being pronounced against her, she must have lived forever. It em- braced also his posterity, or why should they die? If they were not to die, being a part of the original Adam, it would not be true that the whole of his dust should return to dust. But his posterity were embraced in the transactions with Adam. " Let us make man" 8cc. " And let them have dominion." " Be fruitful and multiply and re- plenish the earth and subdue it." " Behold 1 have given you every herb" 8cc. 341. run Eve, life. From D'H to live. The reason here assigned, " because she yras the mother of all living," seems to express rather the view of the writer, than of Adam. Whilst Adam and the woman were standing arraigned before the Creator for sin, it is probable that Adam was in expectation of immediate death, the language of the prohibition having been, " in the day thou eatest thereof thou shalt surely die." The very first gleam of hope which he had, must have been gathered from the intimation, that the woman should have a seed, the necessary inference immediately presenting itself to his mind, that he should survive for a time, and have posterity. On this account in I'emembrance of the first consolation, he denominated her, who had been before called TMl'K ( Woman) mn that is Life. 342. HiTH has been. 3d pers. sing. fem. pret. Kal of HTI to be. 7^ ijito n, vide rule 102, and page 29, n. 343. *n livijig. A noun masc. Hfe, living, n'n fem. the same, from r\*n to live. 62 251 inti^x'^i 117 tDixS 3 c^»^'7^f 154 nw ^s* y^y^^ 343 jt)^ 21 154 nin* 19 i/tD^n 347 jo^^^nSn -46 ^^y 345 niiriD 22 212 )^f2f:i 34 -,n«2 20 n»n ii^ dtkh 133 p 3 CD^n'^t* 351 n'^L:^^ 350 »{3 349 ;-^]-)y<| 183 y*)-) 26 y\^ 348 HV"!*? 305 »:»:5^T 313 D^^nn ^S yyo 277 DJI 339 npSi 352 "n* 3 D^nbi^ 154 nw 355 innbtt^n 354 ♦d^j;'? 353 »ni 23 344. ■jnK'x ^//z/ ivo?na7i. 1 ;/i?/. nj^N in construct, for niS'K. Vide num. 236. 345. mJHD cofl^s (?/^ Sing, is HinD « coc?, from {HD to adhere. Rules 21. 26. 346. *il>' skin. From ""»>' (o stri/i. Hence n"^;^D a cave, and DPJ? 347. DtJ'^S") awrf clothed them. ^ and, convers. D thein. Rule 40. l^aV. 3d pers. masc. sing. fut. Kal of 15'D'' to clothe. 348. n;;nS ^o A-«07y. ^ ?o. n^n for;rT ro know, n is added, and ' re- jected from infin. Kal. Rule 89. If n'n had even a 1 prefixed, it would not be converted to a future; vide in rule V. of the note to num. 19. It is therefore certainly in the past tense. If n;;i'? was in- tended to mean no more than an infinitive, the S needed not to have been prefixed to the word. But r^n may be as well taken for the noun n;n in regimine before 31D; in either way the true translation must be, to the knowledge of good. And the whole passage will read thus; Behold the man ivas as one of xis, to the knowledge of good there is (or, he has added) also evil. Man now knows by sad experience evil, who being once holy like God, was then acquainted only with * The verb Hiyi' is one of the most frequent words in the Hebrew language, and is variously I'endered, e. g. to ordain, Num. xxviii. 6. to afifioint.) Psal. civ. \9. to prejiare, Ezek. xlv. 22. to pro-vide ^ 2 Chron. xxxii. 29. Yi^ jireliared ov provided for their covering by di- recting sacrifices. Or he might have ordained ov appointed the skins of the animals which were to be offered in sacrifice, to be made into coats; we say the skins of sacrifices, because we know of no other use that was made of their flesh. 63 21 Unto Adam also, and to his wife, did the Lord God make coats of skins, and clothed them. 22 And the Lord God said. Behold, the man is become as one of us, to know good and evil; and now, lest he put forth his hand, and take also of the tree of life, and eat and live for ever, 23 Therefore the Lord God sent him forth from the garden of Eden, to till the ground from whence he was taken. good. The sentence is obviously elliptical, and designedly so, for after every supposition, we neither know the design of the tree of life, nor what would have followed the eating its fruit. 349. nn;ri and now. 1 aitd. nn;> or n;? a particle, now. n>' a noun, time^ season. 350. |3 lest. A particle from nja to turn, the turning, a corner. Hence U""!^ faces. 351. hSk''' shall dart forth. It is the 3d pers. masc. sing. fut. Kal of vhw to send forth. 352. n' his hand. 1 his. Rule 39. T the hand, from m"' to reach. Plur. Dn\ 353. *ni and live. 1 conversive. *n is the 3d pers. pret. Kal for rvx\ to live, n final is dropt. Vide rule 102. 354. &iyhfor ever. S prefix. dS>' to hide. As a noun, a tjoung man, futurity. dSi;'S idem.* * dS>» and d'"'))} signify radically duration past, or to come, the com- mencement or termination of which lies concealed. They are often taken to express the eternity of God and his attributes; but are used to express time finite, indefinite, and infinite, and wliich of the three must be determined by the sense. They are usually rendered in the 70, by ettm, and like it are used in the plural to signify ages in some passages, and in others the world. Vide Psal. Ixxiii. 12. Eccles. iii. 11, and Heb. i. 2. xi. 3. This last text clearly proves the error of those, who would confine the word aiava always to signify in the New Testament, ages, states, or dis/iensatians of things; for " the 64 358 p{^»«| 117 Dixn 4 r)6< 357 ttnr^ 356 c^:?^ 339 np*? 24 4 n«i 339 tDO-nDH 4 nK 177 pv i76 ^y^ i78 ai])D 4nN 363 -|iotj^«7 362 nDflnDDH 361 2nnn seo i^r\b 313:D«nn58Vy 364-^-|-| 355. innSa''l cnrf sent him forth. 1 cnrf convers. in him. Rule 39. nSa'^ vide num. 351. 356. D'ki'D /ro7n nvhence. D yj-o;??. Rule 176. DK? Mere. Vide num. 179. 190. things which are seen" express the visible creation, from which the writer descends to Abel, Enoch, Noah, Abraham, &c. The Hebrews also expressed ybrever bynVJ continually. Job iv. 20, xiv. 20. XX. 7, Sec. ~\^ further; Ps. Ixxxiii. 17, xcii. 7. cxxxii. 12. 14, &c. pK length. Psa. xxiii. 6. xciii. 5; DV day. Psa. xciii. 5. xxxvii. 26. Gen. xliii. 9. xliv. 32, &c. nnx. Lev. xxv. 23. 30, to cut off, and Dip Prov. viii. 23. to be before.^ antiquity, &c. But no word in the Hebrew expressed so frequently as dSi;?, or more strongly endless futurity. 65 24 So he drove out the man: and he placed at the east of the gar- den of Eden cherubim, and a flaming sword which turned every way, to keep the way of the tree of life. 357. tyiJ^l and he exjidled. 1 convers. lyii' is the 3d pers. sing. Vase, fut. Kal of li'U to cast out. 358. pa?'l and he filaced. 1 convers. pji'' is the 3d pers. sing. masc. fut. Kal of pty to Jilace. 359. D'^'lDn angels^ or cmbleins of majesty, n emphat. Plur. of 23*15 or 2113 which may be derived from 2 as, rule 173, and 21 ,^reat, the character of God. Psa. xlviii. 2. 3") "]Sd the great Kijig. 360. lyrhjlaming. It is the part. Ben. Kal of DH^ to burn. 1 is omit- ted. Vide rule 78. 361. ainn a sword, n emphat. 3"in a sivord, devastation, to waste. 362. DDannon turning ufion itself, n prefix. The part. Ben. fem. Hithpael of 13n to turn. Preventing an approach from every quarter. 363. nDtyS to guard, h prefix. IDJy infin. Kal to watch or kee/i. Rule 142. 364. "]■)! the way. As a verb, to go, or cotne. As a noun, a path, a star, a Journey. Also immediately. When life was forfeited, its pledge was removed; an exclusion from the tree showed that the terms of life had become impossible to fallen man. 66 GENESIS XV. 293 ^-|»n 47 «7{^ 19 -|0{^«7 369 HTHD:! 368 Q^nX 47 Sfc< 372 ri2ln 371 -j^Dtr 135 -|«7 370 p^ 294 ^^JJ^ 368 f^^^t^ 296 nD 154 mn» 373 tj-^j^ ses diik 19 * -ia«n i^o :^j^a 2 325 p") 376 1-|nj7 375 -^^"in 294 ^^jj^^ 304 1^ 374 ^J-jH 365. inN after. A particle. As a verb, to defer, or delay; as a noun, another, posterior, &c. ""inN the same. 366. Dnain things. H emphat. Dn:Dl plur. *13T a thiii^, a ivordf to speak. In regim. "13"I. "(2nD a ivilderness. 367. "Cn ^Ae JFord. As the Word, he by whom God reveals him^^ selftomanin creation, redemption, and judgment, existed in the * The 1 with which this verse commences may be translated for, as in Isa. iii. 7. Jer. xvii. 8, and Job xix. 25, and then, as has been well observed, the second verse may be considered as a parenthesis expressing what had happened before the vision. Vau supplies in the Hebrew the place of almost every conjunction, and therefore re- quires in a translation a great variety of renderings. There are also some peculiarities in the use of this conjunction. Vau coming be- tween two substantives sometimes is to be omitted, and one of them taken as an adjective expressing a property of the other, ihws judg- ment and righteousness frequently occurs for " righteous judgment.^' On the contrary, when omitted between two verbs, one should be rendered adverbially; thus, they hasted they forgat, is rendered " they soonforgat." Ride thou, prosper thou, is " ride prosperously." But when the same substantive is repeated after Vau, it usually implies distribution. Thus a man and a man means different men, Psal. Ixxxvii. 5. " This and that 7naTi." An ephah and an ephah, is " divers measures." A stone and a stone, is " divers iveights." A heart and a heart is " a double heart," different heai'ts, one in expression, and the other concealed. 67 GENESIS XV. 1 AFTER these things the word of the Lord came unto Abram in a vision, saying, Fear not Abram, I am thy shield and thy exceeding great reward. 2 And Abram said. Lord God, what wilt thou give me, seeing I go childless, and the steward of my house is this Eliezer of Damascus? beginning, and so from eternity, it may be, that it was he, who thus appeared in a vision unto Abram. Postea 12T 3d pers. m. fut. Kal o» 12T to speak. n^T 3d pers. pi. pret. 368. D12X Abram. 2i' to be naked. Plur. D'T"TJ? Lev. XX. 20, 21, 377. ptyn a mover ov director. Rule 178. pa? to 7novc. liyo p the chief director, the son of the steward, the son of one who runs about my house, or the sonofMasek, viz. my handmaid. Septuag. 68 380 nry^Stc 379 pt^^^-i 192 ^^in srs »n»:i 377 ptj^^ 302 nnn:i 159 ^«7 304 y^ 133 p 368 q-^^n '^ •^^t^^i 3 382 J*]-!^ 381 ti?-|V 378 ^J-j^^ 325 p 133 n^HI 317 V^t 159 ^»7 19 -^^i^L, 383 vb>t^ 154 HIH* 367 -)y^ 133 HiHl * 386"^^j;»3;2 385 Ky»40 *){^}^ 384 £3}^ 25 1^ 296 j-^J 381 *jJi^*\>» i9iD«n -s7 nvinn 149 in« 385 5<%,mi ssi ;-|5j;-jm 192 j^in 5 83 DUDOn 391 -IflDl 390 HD^Dt^^n 389 «: 388 OIH 218 iS 19 nO«»1 85 Dn?^ 39i -^Qot^ 392 «;,;3-|n 384 Q^ 395 nnt:^m 154 nino 394 p^*ni 317 :-|y-it 20 n»n» 393 no 6 378. "'n''J 7?2;/ house. ' nz!/. Rule 34. JT'D house^ household^ capacity.) teinfile^ ivithin. r\2 a daughter, fiupil of the eye, from TMI to build. 379. pi:!r:i-] Da?nascene, oi Da7nasciis. Ezek. xxvii. 18.Zech. ix. 1. iVmos iii. 12. v. 27. 380. irj?'S{< Eliezer, or 'Sn /o me ir;.' a /!'T I know that I shall be justified or acquitted. Vide Job xxvii. 5. Prov. xvii. 15. As often as it denotes an action towards another, it always sig- nifies to absolve, or declare righteous, and is opposed to condemn.* 397. ynx^^in have brought thee. "] thee. "TlX^fin is the 1st pers. sing, pret. Hiph. of n:^' changing the radical "' into 1, and dropping ' cha- racteristic. Vide rules 89^81. num. 385. * The bishop of Rochester, in his notes on Hosea, observes on the word pni', that it " is properly a forensic word, and signifies a person found not guilty, acquitted and justified upon a trial. Hence, in a theological sense, it is a person found innocent in the sight of God. In the book of the Psalms, and occasionally elsewhere in scrip- ture, it is a title of Christ, in his human nature, and should be ren- dered the Just One. He who stands justified by the perfectncss of his own obedience. The only one of the human race who ever was just, or justified by his own justice. The plural D'pn::;, except when the matter of the discourse is relative to men's secular transactions, signifies " the justified" those that are justified by faith in the Re- deemer coming, or to come, and clothed with his righteousness." « With respect to the singular p'l:^, Hutchinson, though he consi- ders it as a title of Christ, renders it " the justifier." But he is mis- taken. The Hebrew word for " justifier" should be p'nVD from the Hiphil of the verb. But this word, p'-^fo, is never used as a title of Christ." Critical JVotes on Hosca, p. 182. 71 7 And he said unto him, 1 am the Lord that brought thee out of Ur of the Chaldees, to give thee this land to inherit it. 8 And he said, Lord God, whereby shall I know that I shall inhe- rit it? 9 And he said unto him, Take me an heifer of three years old, and a she-goat of three years old, and a ram of three years old, and a tur- tle dove and a young pigeon. 398. niND/rom ^zfr, or Ur of. r^from. "IIX isjire. Vide num. 21. It is supposed Ur was so called from the worshipping of fire. 399. Dni^D the C/ieshdimy or Chaldees. It is by no means clear, that Ur was a city, it was probably a district of country. Gen. xi. 28. 31, Acts vii. 3. It lay in the land of the Chaldeans. That Mesopotamia was the place of Abram's original residence, appears also from the words of Stephen. But that there was an ulterior Mesopotamia, and that Abraham came from a country more eastwardly, seems highly probable. See the Geographical Excursions annexed to the new edi- tion of Dr. Wells's Sacred Geography, No. X. See this word in its changes in Dan. ii. 5. 10. iii. 8. iv. 4. (7.) v. 7. 1 1. 30. Ezra v. 12. 400. nrh to give. S prefix, nn infin. Kal of jn: to give. Vide rule 108. Vide num. 374. 302. 410. 401. P.nw^h for fiossessing of it. h prefix, n suffix. Pi'^"^ is the infin. Kal of L^T. Vide rule 90, and num. 381. 402. nJii/TN I shall inherit it. HJ it. Vide rule 39. IJ'TN is 1st pers. sing. fut. Kal. Vide num. 401. 403. nSj;^ a calf or heifer. A fern, noun. Sjj? masc. a steer, or calf The radical meaning is roundness. 404. ntySe^rD of three years old. A participial noun fern, from vh]^ to treble. Vide num, 66, 486. 405. rj?1 and a goat. 1 and. i;r a goat, from |T;r to be strong. 406. S'XI and a ram. 1 and. S'N from Sn to interpose. S'XD, of J as. and Vx a ram, or stag. 407. '"!ni and a turtle dove. 1 and. From "IH to exjilore, because they migrate in winter. 408. '??U1 and a young pigeon. 1 and. hwi from StJ to plunder. Rule 158, 72 85 an^ 409 -innn ^^i r\bH 97 ^3 4 n« 218 1*7 274 np»i \o 413 inn 412 riK'ip^ ^u ^-^nn 236 t^^^t^ 410 p»i se -j^nn 416 t3»yn 415 ^y\ 409 nnn 159 ^^ 4i4 "^flvn 4 nt^i n 20 »nn 268 tD'^ni^ ss oni^ 418 ;itfif»i 417 CDHJisn 13 ^y 1? 13 »7j; 226 nbfii 227 nDTUTi 420 ii'):^^ 419 t:^i::tj^n 226 n*7£):j 80 n*?!:! 12 nDtrn42i hd^k issn^niseso-^nt^ 25 O 269 y,n 269 y-j^ 368 Dia^S ^^ n»K»1 13 JvSj? ^- 135 dhS 159 ^{«7 7 y-|{^;2 317 -^y-^^ 20 n^n' 422 -^;| 75 JHity 425 nit^D 88 ymX ^5 tDH^ 424 l^y^ 423 DnnVI 409. •^ny^ and he divided. 1 and., conver. T\y is the 3d pers. tnasc sing. fut. Kal of "in^ to divide. Also "in3 is a part, 410. \r\'"\ and placed. 1 convers. jH' for jnr is the 3d pers. sing, tnasc. fut. Kal of ;nJ. Vide num. 400. 302. 411. nnn his division. 1 his. R. 39. For in3 vid. num. 409. nn3 JJ?"'N /Ar ?Ha?z ofhispart^ or each part. Substantives in construction often sup- ply the place of adjectives or participles, as h^^'h'y ''12 sons of BeliaU for base men; nJty Dniy^' p a son oftiventy years., for twenty years old; ■•Jlj p fj^e son ofmyjloor^ for threshed grain. 412. nxipS ybj- ?/ie meeting of ^ or opposite to. h for. nx'lp in con- struct, for n;op a noun fern, a ineeting; from J<"ip ^o meet, to happen, to call. Vide num. 29. 413. '\T^'^'^ its companion. 1 its. Rule 39. nj?1 en associate^ the will- and;-'"! masc. from n;n to feed. Vide num. 517. 414. ISi'n thefovjl. n emphat. 13]f a bird., sparrow. As a verb, tc 7nove quickly. 415. HTI and descended. 1 a?jc?. This is the 3d pers. m. sing. fut. with 1 conversive. Num. 19, n. and rule 90. nT to descend. Hence TlID affliction. 416. D'^'n a bird of prey. T\ emphat. D"";* a ravenous fowl^ from \2y to move, or 7'ush violently. 73 10 And he took unto him all these and divided them in the midst, and laid each piece one against another, but the birds divided he not. 1 1 And when the fowls came down upon the carcases, Abram drove them away. 12 And when the sun was going down a deep sleep fell upon Abram, and, lo, an horror of great darkness fell upon him. 13 And he said unto Abram, Know of a surety that thy seed* shall be a stranger in a land that is not their's, and shall serve them; and they shall afflict them four hundred years. 417. D'lJBn the dead carcases, PI emphat. Sing. IJD a dead body, plur. □'"IJS. As a verb, to faint, or relax. 418. ^a'"'! and he drove away. 1 and conv. ^K'' is the 5d pers. sing. fut. Kal of 3iy: to blow, or blow away. Vide rule 94. Or it is the 3d pers. sing. pret. Kal of nty to sit down. In the Septuag. " sat down with them." But the former is the true solution, because it is the relation of a past action, and the 1 converts the future to the perfect. 419. K'Dtyn the sun. n emphat. K'ntJ' the sun, light. "'ni^Oty windows. The root is ti'Oty to serve. 420. nid"? at rising, or going down, h prefix. ^;13 a participial noun from X3 to come, or go. 421. nro'N a dread. A noun fern. D'N masc. the same. They are perhaps from nan to make a tumult. 422. 11 a sojourner. As a noun fern, mj the same, from *iJ to so- journ, or dwell. "lU a cub, IJ" to fear, mj to excite., or siir ufi, and "HJI to saw, are said to have " an intercommunity of secondary senses" Avith "1J or 11J to sojourn. 423. DHjJJI 072^ shall serve them. \ convers. D thern. Rule 40. y^2]} is the 3d pers. masc. plur. pret. Kal of "13>\ Num. 162. 424. i:>'1 and they shall afflict. 1 convers. Ijj; for IHJ;; 3d pers. masc, plur. pret. Kal of n^;; to afflict, or affect. Rule 102. 425. nii^O hundreds. Plur. noun fern, from sing. riNO or N*NO or 'ND an hundred. With njK^. Rule 1 19. num. 486. K 74 294 O^^ 428 p 427 ^IV* *° *1ti^i* "^^6 l^jjpl 4 j-)^ 426 Q^^ 14 430 n- N*1 «' .'bn:! 429 ^^-,2 385 1^%J» 44 p 365 l-^nX"! ^5 434 nnpn 43.1 tD)bti^2 432 -j»nn« 47 ^^ 431 ^^:in 133 n^pi 437 l^^ti^^ 88 »J7»2"» 436 '^Hl 26 tniltO ^35 Hl^tt^l ^^ . 133 :nin 440^^439 n/2J^y 40 ^J^^ 445 ^*^ 444 ^J'^j'^^ 443 tJJ^y 442 •^^^]-) 426. DJ1 awe? also. 1 anrf. Dj moreover. DJ, Di as well as. 'Ijn ^/^e wa- ?zon, n ^/zf, '1J G« nation, plural CJ or D U nations, U c society, 1J and nu a (5o(/j/. DJ and nu occur not as verbs in the Hebrew scriptures. 427. n::;?'' they shall serve. It is the third pers. plur. masc. fut. of "T3>' to serve. Vide num. 423. 428. p judging. This may be taken as the participle Ben. Kal, () being omitted by rule 78) of the root J"i to Judge. Yet as verbs do not always agree with their substantives, but in their radical form are often used as if of various persons or tenses, this word has been ge- nerally rendered in this passage as if it had been px and the nation ivill I judge, or "H^i, 1 giving p the force of a future. If another verb with a Vau following it had gone before this veib, there could be no objection to such a rendering; but as it is, I think this to be a Hebrew present (ense. See num. 642. 429. \VD^2 with wealth. 2 with. \V2^ wealth. As a verb, to earn. 430. nnxi and thou. 1 and. HN, nnx thou, plur. DflK ye, rule 31, from nnx to approach. 431. «ljn thou shall go. 1 is inserted by rule 77. J^lin is the 2d pers. masc. sing. fut. Kal of N3 to go. 432. yr\2ii thy fathers. "] thy. ' is added because in regiminc, though a masc. in n plural. Vide rule 27. n3X for HDN as if fern. Vide rule 21. The sing, is 3«. Vide rule 23. Vide num. 247. 669. 433. DlVtyn in peace. 2 in. DlViy a noun, or participle Paoul Kal of zhui to perfect, or de at peace. 75 H And also that nation whom they shall serve, will I judge; and afterwards shall they come out with great substance. 15 And thou shalt go to thy fathers in peace, thou shalt be buried in a good old age. 16 But in the fourth generation they shall come hither again; for the iniquity of the Amorites is not yet full. 17 And it came to pass, that when the sun went down, and it was dark, behold a smoking furnace and a burning lamp that passed be- tween those pieces. 434. "Opn thou shalt be buried. It is the 2d pers. sing. m. fut. Niph. of 13p to bury^ which as a noun is a sepulchre. 435. riTty^ in old age. '2 in. riD'tJ? hoariness. From 2W to return; as a noun also, old age. 436. "im and a generation. 1 and. in a generation^ a round heafi. "IT a circle. Chald. to inhabit. 437. laity they shall return. It is the 3d pers. masc. plur. fut. Kal of 3ty with 1 inserted by rule 77. 438. \\}! iniquity or punishment. From mj? to pervert. Vide num. 183. 439. ")DJi£) 1 ^S? 365 Dnni* 3 C3>nSi^^^i 475. "jTlSx My God. "] Mt/. Vide rule 36. '•n'^M is in construct, with I- Rule 24. Vide num. 3, 534. 476. Dn^jr servants. Plural of "?3;^ a servant, fern. m3^\ Vide num. 162.423.427.481. 477. 'JiS my face. D'J-J a noun masc. plur. the face ov faces. Vide num. 14. It is here in construction before ' vide rules 24. 34. And according to the note upon rule 34, the noun loses its -'' of the plural as well as the □ before this suffix. 478. Voi) a carved image. As a verb, to cut or chip. 479. nJlDn a sitnilitude. A noun fern, from HJO to distribute^ as all the parts are distinctly given in a likeness. 480. mnniSTl shalt not boiv thyself. H in the end of this word is pa- ragogic, and does not affect the sense. Although n paragogic does not appear in the paradigma (rule 75) to be applied to any but the 2d pers. masc. in the preter and imperat. and first persons of the future, and to the infinitive, yet it may be annexed to any person, or to the participles; so may N be added to any person ending in 1 though not named in the rule. But practice will best teach the use of the aeuinty or paragogic letters, N, n, i, ', i, n, for the discovery of which a trans- 83 EXODUS XX. 1 And God spake all these words, saying, 2 I am the Lord thy God, which have brought thee out of the land of Egypt, out of the house of bondage. 3 Thou shalt have no other gods before me. 4 Thou shalt not make unto thee any graven image, or any likeness of any things that is in heaven above, or that is in the earth beneath, or that is in the water under the earth. 5 Thou shalt not bow down to them, nor serve them, for I the Lord thy God am a jealous God visiting the iniquity of the fathers upon the children unto the third and fourth generation of them that hate me. lation should be always at hand to the learner, and the marginal readings will be also found singularly useful. If this word were in regular form, it would be nni^nn in the second pers. sing. m. fut. Hithpael. For the change of n into 1, and the pla- cing of n after Jy, and for the root, vide num. 457. 481. D13;?n thou shalt not serve them. D them. Rule 40. nn^'H is the 2d pers. m. sing. fut. Kal of i::;'. Num. 162. It is observable in all these instances of prohibition that the future tense is used, and not the imperative; with respect to which it is said to be an invariable rule in the Hebrew language, that the imperative mood never pro- hibits, and is never constructed with a prohibitory particle. Vide the bishop of Rochester's notes on Hosea, chap. ix. 482. 7N God. As a verb, to intcrjiose. The term seems to regard his providential government, and thus expresses more immediately the divine wisdom, power, and goodness. Vide num. 3. 373. 154. 483. y^y^ jealous. As a verb, to burn luitji zeal, oy jealousy , to be in- dignant. 484. npiD visiting. It is the participle Ben. Kal of Ipi) to visit. Vide rule 75. Some read np3 in this place. Rule 78. 485. p;; the iniquity. And pi>'. From m>* to [lervert. vSometimes it is put for/mn?s/z7?z6'«;. Num. 183 84 488 V^^fi^^ 487 ^I'^yy 1 3 ^jj^ 486 D^tJ^St^' ^ ^ ^y 325 Q^J^ 486. W^'\ihw of the thirds, or of the third generation.* *A TABLE OF THE HEBREW NUMBERS. • n. < • v u I- o •n a Cardinal Nouns. Ordinal Nouns. N 1 nnx masc. ? naxfem. \°'"'- J^''^^"'"''? First 3 2 o°;'iri'- : 3 tn-:w|">- i^^^^hw f. 5 T^^^^- n 4 ;r3-\N f . > o n 5 '^"'^" ^- ? five ntJ'Dnm.5 1 6 TWW m. 5 ^ r\'^u; f. 3 ^>xtn. T n ID 7 8 9 n-rDs:. f. I Eighth. ;rtyn f. ? . r;?>^;?-^i-^- ^ 10 -iiy;' f. ? , ;r^TlTenth. t Cardinal nouns of number, from three to ten, -when masculine, have a feminine termination; and when feminine, they have a mas- culine termination. 85 ■M a a, o .a my. Rule 34. niVrD plur. nivrD, from n formative, and m]f to command. Vide num. 542. 495. Kl^'n thou shalt take. It is the 2d pers. ra. sing. fut. Kal of Xty: dropping the first radical. Rule 94. Postea Nty third pers. sing. masc. fut. Kal. 496. XltyS in vain, S prefix. Nity vaJiity, a lie, a vain idol. Adverbial- ly, to no purpose. A97. TXny will not clear from guilt, or /iu?iishment. It is the third pers. m. sing. fut. Kal of npi to clear, or cleanse. Rule 86. 498. lOI re?nember. It is the imperat. 2d pers. masc. sing, of IDT to remember. 1 is often inserted before the last radical of the imperative. Rule 77. 499. Wy^h to keefi it holy, or for sanctifijing it. S prefix. 1 suffix-. B^np infin. Kal. Vide rule 142, and num. 148. 500. TW' /o iAzs /zme, i/er. 509. n33 ho7iour. It is the 2d pers. masc. sing, imperat. Kal, to be weighty. As a noun, glory, the liver, See. 510. \yt:h that, b prefix. \)?n used only with h, from HJj' /o c^(?«. 511. jiDiX'' 7nay be long. \ is paragogic. 1J")X"' is the 3d pers. masc. plur. fut. Kal of "jix to be lotig. 512. jnu is givi?ig. It is the participle Ben. Kal of {W io give. Some read tnJ here. Rule 78. 89 thy man-servant, nor thy maid-servant, nor ihy cattle, nor thy stran- ger that is within thy gates. 1 1 For in six days the Lord made heaven and earth, the sea, and all that in them zs, and rested the seventh day, wherefore the Lord blessed the sabbath day, and hallowed it. 12 Honour thy father and thy mother; that thy days may be long upon the land which the Lord thy God giveth thee. 13 Thou shuit not kill. 14 Thou shalt not commit adultery. 15 Thou bhalt not steal. 16 Thou shalt not bear false witness against thy neighbour. 17 Thou shalt not covet thy neighbour's house, thou shalt not co- vet thy neiglibour's wife, nor his man servant, nor his maid servant, nor his ox, nor his ass, nor any thing that is thy neighbour's. 513. n:fin thou shalt not kill. It is the 2d pers. m. sing. fut. Kal of nVT to slay, or to murder. 514. f)Xl"l shalt not commit adultery., or commit whoredom fivith ano- ther's wife. It is the 2d pers. m. sing. fut. Kal of 'IXJ. 515. 3JJn shalt not steal. It is the 2d pers. m. sing. fut. Kal of 33J to steal. 516. nj;;n shalt not answer. It is the 2d pers. m. sing. fut. Kal of nJ^' to sfieak in reference utito. 5 17. ']p'\2 against thy comfianion. 2 pref. "] suff. J^Ictz associate. Vide num. 413. 5 18. ij; testimony, a witness, fem. m>^ the same. 1>' to testify. 519. '^Y'^ false. As a verb, to lie; also as a noun, a falsehood. 520. nonn shalt not covet. It is the 2d pers. m. sing. fut. Kal of HDn to desire earnestly. 521. Tmy and his ox. ^ pref. and 1 suffixed his. "^'J) an ox. The Septuagint, and Junius, and I'remellius have taken "iff in Gen. xlix. 6, also to signify an ox; our translators, Montanus, and the Vulgate, a wall; but it is more probable that the 1 is merely formative, not radical; and that it should be rendered, cxm-/ia/ct/ a Prince, because then it accords with the history of Simeon and Levi, Gen. xxxiv. 25. who slew Shechem, a prince or head of a family, for which their fa- ther was obliged to fly away with his sons, to avoid the danger of re- taliation. The Septuagint have in Hos. xii. 1 1. themselves rendered Ww:: firincesoT rulers; where our translators render it " bullocks." 522. nom and his ass. \ and. 1 suffix, lon an ass from *^Dn to troudle, also wine. M ■uo DEUTEE0N03iY XYIII. 135 -]^ 527 Cl^p» 526 >j^3 525 •j^HKD 524 ^y)^^ 523 J^t^i 1-^ 40*1^^5^ 97 «733 528 ♦•1VDt2?n ^83 vSK ^^75 ^nS^ ^54 piHl ^^ 30 Dvn 531 :innn475 i^nb^ ^ 54 :r])n^ 530 cy^ 529 nSxt:^ 4riK 288 y22ti^«7 533 J^Q^ 159 ^^ 19 -^j^^^j 532 SnpH 8^ n'jnjin 445 tj?«n 4n«i534 t^^^ 154 nin» 239 ^^p 537 :mDl* 159 J^^JI 536 liy 535 n^-^J^ 159 ^^ 306 H^tH 367 :nnn 40 «^{fifX 538 U^D^n 383 1^^ 154 HIH* ^^ IDK^ 17 523. X'DJ a /irophet, an inter Jireter of God's moill^ a spokesman, from $<33 to prophesy. 524. p1pD/7-om ?/ie Tnzrfs? q/" you. nfrom. 1 yow. 31p the inmost part, from a'lp to approach. 525. "^TIND q/'Mt/ brethren. tD o/". "] Mz/. TIK in construct, for DTIN So ver. 18, with DH suffix. Sing, nx c brother, a kinsman^ countryman, also /z/te. As a particle, alas, nnx Chald. ?» consociate. 526. 'JDD Z/Are me. D as. Rule 173. ^ 7;ze. Rule 34. \n from. But when preceded by a particle, p seems to be a mere expletive. It is from nJD to distribute. Hence njOD of or from her, UDD q/* or from him, "'JDD of or from me. Vide num. 212. 527. D'p" tvill raise up. It is the 3d pers. sing. m. fut. of Hiphil of Dp to rise. Vide rule 99. Postea D'px is the first person. 528. IIJ^DB'n shall ye hearken, or obey. \ paragogic. \^rW7\ is the 2d pers. m. plur. fut. Kal of;?D"k2? to hear. Vide num. 288. 529. nSxty thou hast desired. It is the 2d pers. m. sing. Kal of W to ask. 91 DEUTEEONOMY XYIII. 15 THE Lord thy God will raise up unto thee a prophet from the midst of thee, of thy brethren, like unto me, unto him ye shall hear- ken. 1 6 According to all that thou desiredst of the Lord thy God in Ho- reb, in the day of the assembly, saying, Let me not hear again the voice of the Lord my God, neither let me see this great fire any more that I die not. 17 And the Lord said unto me, They have well sfioken that which they have spoken. 530. Djrnyrom. D prefix, and Djr nvith, against j before. As a noun, the iieofile-, or those who are consociated. 531. 3*1713 in Horeb. 3 in. 3"in Horeb. Also, to lie waste, or desolate. 532. Snpn the assembly, n prefix. Snp an assembly; as a verb, it is, to collect. 533. fjON / will not add, instead of fjDXX, vide rule 97. It is the first pers. sing. fut. Kalof f\DN to gather. 534. "TlSx my God, for "hSn. The two Yods coalesce. Vide rule 34, and its note. "• my, and "Tl'^X in construction for D'H^K. Vide num. 3 and 475. hSn apud Arabes, colere, adorare. Vide Kals' Gram. 535. nxix / will not see. It is the first pers. sing. fut. Kal of nxi. Vide num. 24. 536. "WV o"J/ more, yet again. From i;? yet, still,further. 537. niDN I shall not die. It is the first pers. sing, fut. Kal of ma to die. Num. 214. 538. ID'DTI they have well spoken, or done. It is the 3d pers. plur. preter Hiphil of 3t3^ to do good; of the like import as 3D. Vide num. 26. 92 525 Dn'n« 524 yipf2 >35 ^p^ 527 Qip^ .V23 ^t^J ^^ 38; c}^'S^{ ^^<^^ nnn 541 vsn '^^ nnn ^40 »j-ini"i 53^ ^idd 367 -^2T '^0 iti^a 2^^ n:n 540 '^j,^* 528 yj^^j^* 159 ^^^ 530 nOj;C) 544 {^.•^-]^ 294 ♦^i^f 190 1f^^2 539. "jOD /iTre me. "] M^r. ir: t3(-?-z/, from r D w//o. A particle postfix- ed to D, 2, or S. rj'n ?£;?/'/! ihe ve> tj. lOJ as or like the very. IdS to the very. Also 1.; in a pron. liim. 540. Tin:) and I will fiut. 1 convers. Vie], num. 19. T.nJ for "n:n:, is the first pers. sing, preter Kal of |r;J «o (;i've. Vide num. 276. 541. rD2 in his mouth. 1 hiti. 2 in. '3 in construct, for nn a mouth., says Parkhurst, as 'il' forri'ky a lamb or Azrf. But as 3^2 the masc. plur. of riD sometimes occurs, it is probable that '3 and 't? are both plural nouns in regiujinc. 93 18 1 will raise them up a prophet from among their brethren, like imto thee and will put my Words in his mouth; and he shall speak unto them, all that I shall command him. 19 And it shall come to pass, that whosoever will not hearken unto my words, which he shall speak in my name, I will require it of him. 542. UI^N / shall command hwu U him. Rule 39. l^fN for nii\S. Rule 102. It is the first pers. sing. fut. Kal of nii' to command. Vide num. 494. 543. SiS to or unto, is a particle from bx to inter/iose. "Sn is the same. vN is the, that, not, no, ivithin, amo7ig, towards, against, because of, &c. 544. tt/'yia I will require, is the first pers. sing. fut. Kal of K'"!! to require, or inquire. 94 PSALM 1. •^46 mj^n 375 -|«7n 159 «»7 40 y^^ 236 JJ^tf^H 545 1«^t{^tl ^ 550 ^*3y 159 ^^ 549 CD^J^OH ^48 y\^y\ ^47 Q^Vfcy'^ 554 QV^ 25 O 553 t^ti^l 159 }^*7 552 ^»\f'7 551 ^t^lll^ni 2 557 n:in» 555 •m'^inni 555 -j^sn 154 ^^r^'> 555 mini 13 1757 559 t^intj? 58 YVD 22 n'm 31 :nVSi ^^s o^v s 570 inj^n 374 •n^ 59 vns 40 -r^j^ is cd»^ 56o *;i«7{) 60 nt:^y» 40 '-)^i^ 97 «731 571 ^^2^ 159 5^17 284 in^jvi 545. "T^X if/ie blessedness. A noun masc. plur. in construction. From "^tyx i^o 5*0 hafifiily. The plural is used perhaps to intimate that the causes of his happiness are numerous. 546. n:f>'!i in the counsel of. 3 in. ni>' a noun fern, in construct, nyy from ]y to counsel. 547. D'j-'a'n the ungodly. It is a noun masc. plur. The sing, is J.^tyT wicked. As a verb, to condemn. 548. pi31 and in the way of. 1 a7id. 3 ^■n. "jll, a noun masc. sing, a Tjay. As a verb, fo tread. 549. D'Nan sinners. A noun masc. plur. The sing, is N£3n c sinner. As a verb ro sm. Vide num. 577. 550. nn;; Aa^A not stood, is the 3d pers. masc. sing. pret. Kal, and the root. 551. 3tyin31 and in the seat. 1 and. 3 in. nB'ID a noun m. sing, of 32/' to sit. Rule 90. D is formative. Rule 178. 552. D^i^b the scorners. It is a noun masc. plur. of |*S a derider, or deceixier. 553. 3iy' /m^/i not mV^^'w. It is the 3d pers. sing. masc. preter Kal JnPe Yod. Vide num. 551. 554. DK if since, a particle. DN "3 but in truthy but if. 95 PSALM I. 1 BLESSED is the man that walketh not in the counsel of the un- godly, nor standeth in the way of sinners, nor sitteth in the seat of the scornful. 2 But his delight is in the law of the Lord; and in his law doth he meditate day and night. 3 And he shall be like a tree planted by the rivers of water, that bringeth forth his fruit in his season; his leaf also shall not wither, and whatsoever he doeth shall prosper. 555. mini in the law of. 2 in. mm a noun fern. sing, in construct. rriin from riT to project. Vide pages 20, 21, in note. 556. UDH his delight. 1 his. yan a noun m. sing, desire; as a verb to will. 557. run' hath he meditated. It is the 3d pers. m. sing. fut. Kal af' ter 1 conversive. From run to re-volve^ or to mutter.* 558. DDV by daij. An adverbial particle from DV. Num. 30, D affixed sometimes forms adverbs. Vide rule 181. 559. ^^TW planted. It is the participle Paoul Kal from hrw to plant. 569. ■'jSd the rivers of. A noun masc. plur. in construct, from jSs a stream. As a verb, it is to divide. 570. inj/'3 in its season. 2 in. ) his or its. nj^ a noun fem. sing. time. Dy and nnjr now. 571. h)T shall not wither. It is the 3d pcrs. sing. m. fut. Kal of Sij to wither. Vide rules 94 and 77. * Our translators in this psalm often translate the perfect and fu- ture by present time. I see no necessity for it in any one of the in- stances. They furnish an argument thus for Mr, Parkhurst's asser- tion to that purpose in rule 60. I will not deny the position, but am not satisfied with its correctness. The Hebrews made their present 96 554 t3}^ 25 »;3 547 Q^ytt^lH ^^ p 159 ^^ 572'*^>^'^f 4 159 ^^ u p 13 «757 16 jnn ^^^4 iif)-ir) 40 nc^^ 573 yi^^ 5 578 r\iv:i 577 D*^?c3m ^76 to^t^^on ^47 o^yt:^-^ 575 i^p* 396 Cpn^ 548 '^-|-| 154 pin' '^^ ^^tV ^5 O 3^6 tD^P'TV ^ 579 nn^n 547 D^vt^^-^ 548 -^-^ti 572. rv^T shall firosper. It is the 3d pets. m. sing. fut. Hiphil of fh'H to be hapfiy^ov to prosper. 573. I'lDD like the chaff. 2 as. yio a noun masc. sing. Some read^'O, also an oppressor^ from n]fD to squeeze or press. 574. uain driveth it away. U pron. suff. Rule 39. fjnn 3d pers. sing, fem. fut. Kal of 'pj to propel, a verb defective in Pe Nun, and drops ^. Vide rule 94. The pronouns are often redundant in Hebrew, the tense, by omitting the perfect and future. Vide num. 642, post. Of this we have several examples in this psalm. " Blessed is the man." " The ungodly are not so, but are like" &:c. " For the Lord knotveth" Sec. If the reader will render every perfect and future in this psalm according to the directions in num. 19, he will find the meaning is every where good. Nevertheless as I stand wholly alone in my oppo- sition to this translation, as far as 1 know, I advise the reader to re- ceive it only upon his own experience. In the earliest ages poetry and music were united, and poetic compositions were sung in a species of extemporaneous melody; in some such manner as our Indian warriors deliver their harangues; or as the African ladies sang, when Mr. Park was the subject of their song. But the equality in the lengths, and similarity in the construc- tion of some of the sentences in Hebrew poetry, prove, that the Jews had arrived at a refined or artificial harmonious arrangement of syl- lables. " Harmony arises from the proportion, relation, and corres- pondence of different combined sounds; and verse from the arrange- ment of words, and the disposition of syllables according to the num- ber, quantity, and accent." " But the true pronunciation of HebrcAV is lost." — " The number of syllables is, in a great many words, un- certain; the quantity and accent wholly unknown."* What therefore i ' Dr. Lowth. 97 4 The ungodly cere not so; but are like the chaff which the wind driveth away. 5 Therefore the ungodly shall not stand in the judgment, nor sin- ners in the congregation of the righteous. 6 For the Lord knoweth the way of the righteous, but the way of the ungodly shall perish. relative sometimes accompanies the personal affix, sometimes the separate primitive pronoun, and at other times, it is used with the antecedent. 575. IDjT shall not stand. It is the 3d pers. plur. fut. masc. in Kal of Dp. Vide num. 527. 576. £3S3tyD3 in the judgment. 3 in. I32iyD a noun masc. sing, from D3iy to judge. Vide rule 178. 577. D'N£3ni and sinners. 1 and. D\xnn is a noun masc. plural. Num. 549. NDn according to Judges xx. 16. is to miss the mark^ and is ex- actly ajK«(gT«ev»y. 578. mj'a in the congregation. 3 iji. m>' a fern, noun sing, in con- struct, m^ an assembly, from n;?' to apfioint. 579. naxn shall perish. It is the 3d pers. fem. sing. fut. Kal of n3N to perish. the harmony^ and what the verse of the Hebrew language were, it seems impossible to discover; all theories directed to these objects have been hitherto unsuccessful, and w» believe no mortal knows either the one or the other. N 98 PSALM 11. 584 tpi^ 557 IJin^ 583 QV^^Sl 582 CD^IJi 581 ^^^^ 580 HD^ ^ 589 -Tn» 588 HDU 5^^ D^itm ^ V*^^ ^^^ 0*7D ^85 Ul^^n* 2 595 :iD»nn37 594 'i^f2?2 593 nD^St:^iT 592- i^^nnoiD 580. noS wherefore, h prefix. HD as a pronoun, w/zo? ivhich? As a particle, w/^t/.? hoiv? T^'02/or what? nOD //ow many? &c. 581. WJT 7?z«A'f a tumult. It is the od pers. plur. preter Kal of i^JI to make a noise. Aben Ezra explains it by Y\1V\ associate. 582. D'U nations. The sing. MJ is a multitude. U a society. TWyjirin- nesSf body. Why do men of different nations conspire together? 583. D'Dxbl and the Jieoplc. 1 and. S prefix. riDX anation, plur. niDX masc. cox. From DX a ?nother, sufi/wrt, £cc. 584. p'T vanity, also f am. As a particle, m x;af«, only. As a verb, pT to emfity. Efforts against God are vain or ineffectual. 585. nx'n'' shall set themselves. It is the 3d pers. plur. masc. fut. Hithp. of DX' to filactf set, or afifioint. 586. "dSd the kings of. Plur.^in construct, of "jSo a king. Rule 25. As a verb, to rule or goveri^ Herod the great, who was king of Judea, sought to slay Jesus in his infancy. Herod Antipas, who was called a king (Mark vi. 14) and Pilate, who i-epresented the Roman emperor, and the high priests united in, and consulted for the extinguishment of the Messiah, and therein opposed themselves against Jehovah. 587. D'JTm and the counsellors. 1 and. D'JTI") and D'jn from the Ara- ^ bic verb |n to examine or weigh. 588. nolJ take counsel together, lay together their plans. It is the 3d pers. plur. masc. pret. Niph. of nO' to lay a fomidation. Vide rule 90. Though we distinguish the three conjugations of Hebrew verbs into voices, the simple active, simple passive, causal active, and cau- sal passive; and the reflex or middle voice, and each verb generally 99 PSALM II. 1 WHY do the heathen rage, and the people imagine a vain thing. 2 The kings of the earth set themselves, and the rulers take coun- sel together, against the Lord, and against his anointed, saying, 3 Let us break their bands asunder, and cast away their cords from us. _ r- I.I '-r~ - - ri - -■ i i i - -i - i- ■ i i i ' ' — ' passes through these regular changes'^of signification correspondent unto the grammatical inflections; yet the change in signification is by no means uniform. Many verbs have different, and often opposite meanings in the several conjugations; and must be learned from the lexicons and use, as if they were different words. Thus whilst some verbs in sense have really five voices in one and the same conjuga- tion; others have really five conjugations, and are distinct words in them all, though they may have the same radical letters. 589. in"' together, from irT" to unite. 590. in'tyn his Anointed. 1 his. H'lyo a ^lerson anointed, or instituted into the office of a king or priest, Christ. Froin nti'D to anoint. 591. npnJJ let us break, n paragogic. pn^J is the 1st pers. plur. fut. Kal of pnJ to break. Vide rule 6 1 . 592. ID'nnoiD their chains. 10 their. Rule 40. For "' sufiaxed, vide rule 27. ni"lD1D a noun fem. plur. IDID a chain, from IDI to restrain. The laws of God and the gospel of Christ, being the purest system of mo- rals, appear as chains and cords to the licentious, from which they determine to free themselves. 593. nJ''^^J1 and ive will cast anvaij. \ and. 71 paragogic. y^lif^ first pers. plur. fut. Hiph. of *]'7iy to cast away. 594. 1JD:d yro7n us. p, 'JO, ^from, perhaps from HJO to distribute. 1JDD forUWD. D prefix, and 13 w*. R. 35. Vide num. 212. It is said that the D adds energy, thus whilst IJD is/ro?« us, UOD mcdins far from us. 13 is also him. Rule 39. UOD " a nobis, sive ab illo." It has been render- ed, " cast away — from him." But this does not agree wdth the sense, for the Lord and his Anointed have been spoken of. 595. lO'-na;' their cords, m their. Rule 39. 'niV in construct. D'n^V 100 599 J^J^S 598 ;|yy 373 ^^^^ 597 pnt^^* 5 O^^t!?! 596 ^t^V ^ 602 lil^nni 601 1fit^:i 383 •DI^^'^^ 367 ^2y 600 •^ 5 13 ^y 586 ^^t^J^ 604 tpXi 294 ^^^^1 603 nDSnl* ^ 609 pn 151 ^i^ 608 nnSD« 607 J»{i^-|p 606 »^n 605 |V1{ 7 and nin!i;^ plur. n3;r and ni3;? sing, a cord from n3;> ro intwine. Sept. Tsv ^i;y«!) «t;T6iy. Vulgate, 7 w^'zfm ipsorum. The Syriac, Arabic, and Ethiopic agree with these. 596. 2m' is sitting: Part. Benoni Kal of 3'«!/"' my. S^^ip. Vide num. 148. 608. maON I will declare, n paragog. It is the first pers. sing. fut. Kalof 13D to enumerate, announce. Num. 391. pn Sn ni3DN in the Vulgate, close the sixth verse, firxdicam/tracejitum ejus: in the Sep- tuag. they begin the seventh verse, AixyyiXXuv to n^a^'vot.y^x Kv^m. The most ancient and most received sense seems to be, that God hath commissioned the Mediator to declare his commandment, or re- veal his will, pn S5< is also translated ad decretum; juxtavel secundmn statutum; prxscriptum et modum cerium: that is, that Messiah should reveal or declare according to the divine command, without deviating from it. But Acts xiii. 33. shows this passage to have been fulfilled by the resurrection of Christ from the dead, and in Rom. i. 4. Paul again expresses the same thing, that Jesus was by his resurrection decla- red to be the son of God with power. Thus these words are a prophe- cy, and have been accomplished. 609. pn a decree, from ppn to engrave. pPI is the purpose of God relative to man's salvation. 102 294 ♦ii* 430 -|n« 325 IJ^J * 383 i^^ 19 •^^^ 154 HIH* 302 niHKI 594 *i»2D 610 S^tT ^24 J-j^nib* 30 QVH ^ 7 jp^ 613 ^D«3t« 612 -|nrn«1 en •^j-l'^m 532 cn*^;j 617 ^)^y> 616 ^'^^^ 615 J^jnn 467 to:2ti^n 614 tDvin ^ 620 1'-)Din 619 ibOJ^^n 586 Q^^O 570 Hnyi 618 tD^JSin 10 293 HN^a 154 nin*4 riJ^ I62 •l-i:iy 7 jp^^ 628 »J0C3{y 11 601 t^iJ^t 350 ^3 624 *^2 623 '\p\i;^ 622 :n^yil 621 •\V:i^ ^2 610. Sxiy fisAr. Imperat. Kal, 2d pers. m. sing, of S^iy to ask, desire, "% demand. " 611. "jnSn^ thine inheritance, "j thine. nSn3 in construct. nbnJ a fios' session^ from SnJ ^o possess. 612. "intnxi cnrf thy fiossessio7i. 1 a«rf. "] r^;/. In regimine. HTHX from ?nN to take^i catchy seize. 613. 'D3N the borders, in construct. A noun masc. plur. 03X sing, the end, from DSN ?o cease, or fail. * The Syriac version of Acts xiii. 33, where the rest of this verse is quoted, presents us with the Hebrew words, except the changes peculiar to that dialect; :"]mV NJrDV NJX nJN "\2'^ " Filius mens es tu; ego hodie genui te." As Paul was addressing himself " to children of the stock of Abraham," (ver. 26) it is probable that these are the very words which he uttered. If so, they show both, that he used the Hebrew scriptures, and that the Jews understood this psalm to be a prophecy of the Messiah; otherwise his argument would have re- quired, that this fact should have been established. The terms, this day have I begotten thee, indicate that Christ is not a son by adoption, as angels and men may be sons, but that he partakes of the nature of the Father, and has by inheritance obtained a jnore excellent name than they. Heb. i. 4, 5. Every other name is capable of being refer- red to his representing the Father to men, and bearing his authority, but this speaks his nature the same, and consequently divine. From his sonship must be excluded inferiority, for he is equal to the Father, and /ios^ffnorzVy, for he is from eternity. The words this day are a part of the decree or eternal purpose of God, which was manifested to men by Christ's resurrection. Vide num. 608. 103 7 I will declare the decree: the Lord hath said unto me, Thou art my Son; this day have I begotten thee. 8 Ask of me, and I shall give thee the heathen /"or thine inheritance and the uttermost parts of the earth/br thy possession. 9 Thou shalt break them with a rod of iron; thou shalt dash them, in pieces like a potter's vessel. 10 Be wise now therefore, O ye kings; be instructed, ye judges of the earth, 1 1 Serve the Lord with fear, and I'ejoice with trenibling. 614. D;;in thou shalt break them. D them. Rule 40. j?"in is the 2d pers. sing. m. fut. Kal of >'"i to break. It is probable that the Scptuag. understood the root to be rtj^l tofeed, for they have it, Uoifiavea ccvlsii £» fxZdco cri^^»i the Vulgate also has, Reffes eos in tdrgaferrea. Tho figure is certainly borrowed from the pastoral life. Many of Kenni- cott's books have D^'nn. 615. Sn3 of iron. A noun, perhaps from 13 bright^ and Sli toj'use, or melt. It is very bright before it melts. 616. ^^DD as a vessel. Das. Rule 173. "Sd a noun masc. from nS3 to make. Perhaps it is here the plural in construction. 617. "yav of him ivho makes it. Part. Benoni Kal of IX"* to fashion.. 618. D2f33n shalt thou break them. D them. Rule 40. ySJn 2d pers. masc. sing. fut. Kal of |'£)J to scatter. 619. iSoiyn be wise, 2d pers. masc. plur. imperat. Hiphil ofSjty to be wise. 620. noin be instructed, 2d pers. masc. plur. Niphal of ID' to cor- rect.'' is changed into 1. Vide rule 89. 62 1. iVjil and rejoice. 1 and. iS'j is given as a verb in Oin Vau by Byth- ner, but if it be, as he allows^ in the 2d pers. m. plur. imper. Hiphil, it is most probably given correctly by Parkhurst as a biliteral, the n which is charactei'istic of that conjugation being dropped. Vide rule 98. bj is also to roll. 622. mj?"13 in trembling. 3 m. m;?1 is from '}p'^ to tremble. 623. IPE'J kiss ye, i. e. reverence. Gen. xli. 40. 1 Sam. x. 1. 2d pers. masc. plur. imperat. Kal of pt^J to kiss. Vide Parkhurst on this word, for the custom to which this scripture alludes. 624. na the Son, the fiure man, from 13 to fiwify, ^3 my ^mre, like 104 6pi 1t)t« 626 tbyaD 625 ^yy 25 ^^ 548 y\^ 579 y^^^^fW 63 Ji:i 627 ^Din 97 ^^ 545 1*^^^ my dear, expresses affection, hence probably 13 a son, and m3 a daughter. 13 in Chaldee is p in Hebrew. There are some other words which are either Chaldee, or formed in the Chaldee manner in the Psalms; thus in PsaJ. cxxxix. 17. ']y\ thy friends, may be in Chaldee, thy thoughts. Psal. cxvi. 12. TilblDJn for r'lnin his benefits. There are a few instances of the Chaldee dialect in other parts also of the Old Testament. The portions which are wholly written in Chaldee are the following; the book of Ezra from the eighth verse of the fourth chapter, to the twenty-seventh verse of the seventh chapter; in the book of Jeremiah, the eleventh verse of the tenth chapter; the book of Daniel from the fourth verse of the second chapter to the end of the seventh chapter. As the letters, the manner of reading, the parts of speech, the numbers and genders of nouns. Sec. are the same as in the Hebrew, and there is the most stri- king similarity between the regular and irregular verbs in the re- spective languages, the ordinary helps given by the Hebrew lexico- graphers, for understanding those portions of scripture, will prevent any difficulty that might be apprehended from them. 625. lya- shall ki?idle, or 6urn. 3d pers. sing. masc. fut. Kal of 1^3 Co inflame. 105 12 Kiss the Son, lest he be angry, and ye perish/rom the way, ■\vheii his wrath is kindled but a little. Blessed are all they that put their trust in him. 626. 0>'0D as a little. 3 as. £3;>0 a little, a few. As a verb, to be di- minished. 627. 'Din trusting. riDH to shelter ojieself., to trust. Pai't. Ben. Kal noin, plural D'Din dropping the H before '. Vide rule 102. The late Dr. Wilson of Edinburgh, in his " Elements of Hebrew Grammar,**^ accounts thus for this remarkable defect of D final. " Sometimes the status regiminis is employed to soften the sound, or to vary the ex- pression; when the following word is not the genitive of position, but is governed by a preposition. 13 "'Din they ivho trust in him, for 13 D''Oin." The old grammarians, who delighted to silence difficulties by certain hard words which they denominated figures, have cut this knot by calling it " the enallage of the casus constructus." Blaney observes after Dr. Kennicott, thatD final is in many instances omitted. Dr. Lowth supposes that the status constructus pro absoluto of the grammarians may be an occasional mistake of transcribers, " by not observing a small stroke, which in many manuscripts is made to supply the D of the plural." 628. ^(23^ judges. In constnict. ^3\if a judge. As a verb, to judge. O 106 PSALM XV. 422 ^)>,> 296 ♦j;^ 154 niH* Ver. 1. 630 '^yfy 629 •^^j^tD 375 -j»7in 607 :pti^ip 606 -inn ^32 pti^> 296 »q esi '^bn^n 2 635 :naSn 394 nD« 367 -^^-iT 396 p-|\; 634 «7y£3l 633 O^^^H 413 inV"*^ 38 ptify 159 ^^ 637 ^^^J^^J 13 ^y 636 ^;|*^ 159 ^^ 3 641 :linp 13 Sj7 640 i^^^ 159 J^^j 639 nSim ^38 n^ 154 nin* 644 ^^^i 4 ri^l 643 DNDi 267 V^^n 642 nD^ 4 629. 11010 a psalm, from 10? ^o sm^. 630. nnS ^0 David, i (o.T)! David, ova friend. A psalm given to Da- vid from the Lord. When the word of the Lord came to a prophet, it is usually expressed by trn IJT the word was &c. So inS onDD a golden psalm to Davidy whereby he could say, ITID 131D £3j; 'JltJ?"? twz/ tongue is the fien of a ready writer. To Moses he spake O'JS hn 0"J3 or nsbxns/cce to face. Solomon Bennet, a modern Jewish polemical writer, translates "ilOTD '\^'H prosody on David; and says, " The psalms were not all composed by David himself; many of them were written by different Levitical poets; as Asaph, Hyman, Jeduthun, &c. They consist of prayers, hymns, prosody, 8cc. alluding to various circum- stances of public or private facts." Thus, to avoid the application of the prophetic psalms to the Messiah, he considers them made in honour of David. If his forefathers had been of the same mind, they ' would scarcely have assigned them a place in the CJIDD or Hagio- grapha, and used them in the worship of God. 631. "jSrixa in thy tabernacle. 2 m. "] thy. Snx a tent. As a verb, to dwell. 632. \2W shall dwell. 3d pers. fut. sing. masc. Kal oi\DW to inhabit. 633. D'on uprightly. As a rvoxm, perfection, pure. From ODH to be perfect. 634. S^'SI and worketh. i and. Sj'3 the 3d pers. sing. masc. pret. Kal to labour. Vide rule 87. Rather part. Ben. Kal, rule 78. 635. 133^3 in his heart. 1 his. 3 in. 33^ and 3*7 the hearty from 33*7 to ?nove up and down. ^3*7 my heart, 0333*7 your heart. 107 PSALM xy. A PSALM to David Ver. 1 . Lord, who shall abide in thy taber- nacle? Who shall dwell in thy holy hill? 2 He that walketh uprightly, and worketh righteousness, and speak- eth the truth in his heart. 3 He that backhiteth not with his tongue, nor doeth evil to his neighbour, nor taketh up a reproach against his neighbour. 4 In whose eyes a vile person is contemned; but he honoureth them that fear the Lord; he that sweareth to his own hurt, and changeth not. 636. hr\ backbiteth. od pers. sing. m. pret. Kal to detract. Rather part. Ben. Kal. Rule 78. 637. '\y\oh his tongue. 1 his. \vh and \V:h a tongue^ language, bay. From jB?S to contort. 638. n;^1 evil. From }}^ to break. Vide num. 646. 639. naim and reproach. \ and. n3in reproach, from 3in to reproach. 640. ^m takes up. It is the 3d pers. m. sing, preter Kal, to lift up. Rather part. Ben. Kal. Rule 78. 641. mp /hs neighbour. 1 his. 3*^0 or 3np a neighbour, from Ulp to approach. 642. ni5J is despised. Particip. Niphal of nf3 to desfiise. Mr. Park- hurst justly observes, rule 60, that participles are used for the^re-^ sent tense. It has been observed by others that in such instances the substantive verb riTl is always implied; but if that verb were express- ed, it would make the expression either the preter or future, it can- not be therefore implied. The fact is this, ordinarily if not always, ac- tions past or to come, not proper for the imperative mood, were ex- pressed by the Hebrews by one of their two tenses, if the action was present, no time was expressed, but the participle was substituted. In like manner also the omission of the preter and future of DTi indica- ted the present time. 643. DNDJ the reprobate person. Participle Niphal of DND to spurn., reject, or cast off. 644. "-NT those fearing, or the fearers of. A noun m. plur. in con^ struct. Vid. NT in num. 293. 108 648 1QDD 647 *r\'l2)^ 159 ^"^^ 646 ^>^-if^ 645 y^JJ^^ 509 ^^y S 159 ^^ 651 ♦p^ 13 l^y 650 "^nt^^l 649 -jlJ^^^ 302 ^^ 159 ^^J 354 JDSiVS 653 tOl^t 159 ^t;> 151 ^^^ 38 n^^J? 652 Hp^ 645. J^2cyj having' sworn. Benoni Niphal masc. sing. of;?!J5y to sa- tisfy ^ secure, swear. 646. ^"1717 io Ms eviLys evil, wrong, as a noun; as a verbj to break. n emphat. and S to. Vide num. 638. 647. ID' will not change. It is the 3d pers. masc. sing, preter Kal, converted by 1. Akin to this is "ID to be in bitterness. 648. )BQD his silver. 1 his. BOD silver, to be fiale. Vide num. 195. So ag^yve^ti from »eyog white. 649. yaiD in usury, or biting. D in, and '\^l to bite, to hurt. This word is supposed to mean a contract which converts interest into 109 5 He that putteth not out his money to usury, nor taketh i*eward against the innocent. He that doeth these things^ shall never be moved. principal; or conduct, which produces the same effect; or a very ex- orbitant interest, or premium disproportioned to the risk. In all these instances the party is bitten. This word differs from n''3"in. The cri- tical reader is advised to see each of these words in some Hebrew concordance. 650. nnwi and a gift, y and. nnty a donation. As a verb, to give. 651. yi the innocent. A participial adject. /2wre, c/ear, from np3 ?o cleanse. 652. npb hath not takeii. 3d pers. sing. masc. pret. Kal. Vide rule 93. 653. I3in' shall not be moved. 3d pers. masc. sing. fut. Niphal of £3*3 ■0 sHfij or slide. Vide rules 98, 99, 110 PSALM XXII. 660 ♦nv'it!^»» 659 pin'n ess ♦jnars? 58o naS 657 i^^ 657 ♦^^^ 2 159 }««7T 558 CD12V29 t«-|p}C 534 ♦nSs^ 661 :»n:i^?t2^ 366 f-^^l 3 430nnt<1 304 pS663 H^DH '59 J^^^^Sl nS»Sl 662 HiVH ^ 667 -|2 666 :'7Xne^» 665 H^SHD 664 ^tS^V ^^8 jy-^np ^ 383 y^^ 670 nXSD'jSni 668 inDl 669 li^fint? 668 ^HD^ 6 654. HXJdS ;o rAe c/«(?/' musician. S prefix. n:;JD a chief , ov /irefect. D formative, and ni^J ro fireside. 655. nS'N a hind., or rfoe q^ in construct. Sing. nS'K, plur. niS'N, Masc. Vx a stag, or deer. From hn to interfiose. €56. nnari ?/ie morning, or rfa«;t q/" ^Ae cfc?/. 71 emphat. "in^ ^Ar dawn. As a verb, ^o 3e rfar^ coloured. Some render it, " upon the interposition of darkness," i. e. concerning the onset which the pow- ers of darkness would make on Christ. Rather "concerning the hind of the morning," that is concerning him who was to be hunted and pur- sued as such. 657. 'hiK mi/ God. " pronom. suff. Rule 34. Sx God, the interfioser. 658. 'in^Tj? hast thou forsaken me. ""J me. Rule 34. n^tj; 2d pers. s. m. pret. Kal of 3T;r to forsake. The Syriac words 'Jnp3iy NiaSS-t? Vx are probably those, which were spoken by the Saviour. Matt, xxvii. 46. But some think the three first were the Hebrew words here gi- ven, and the fourth the Chaldee word used in the Chaldee paraphrase at this place. 659. pin") so far, at a distance. It is here used as a particle; as a noun, remote, from pni to be far off. Vide num. 694. 660. ^V>^W"Ofro7n my deliverance. X^from. ' my. D;?W' in construct, for n^Mt:?"' a noun fem. from. V^"' to save. 661. ^r\ym my roaring. ' my. nJNty in regim. fornJkSI? roaringy from iSU; to roar as a lion. Num. 705. Heb. v. 7. Ill PSALM XXII. To the chief musician upon Aijeleth Shahar; a psalm of David. 1 My God, my God, why hast thou forsaken me? Why art thou so far from helping me, and from the words of my roaring? 2 O my God, I cry in the day-time, but thou hearest not; and in the night season, and am not silent- 3 But thou art holy, O thou that inhabitest the praises of Israel. 4 Our fathers trusted in thee, they trusted and thou didst deliver them. 5 They cried unto thee, and were delivered; they trusted in thee, and were not confounded. 662. nyrn wilt not answer. 2d pers. sing. m. fut. Kal of HJ;? to act- ujion, or answer. 663. n'DH silence. A noun fem. from nm to be silent. Silence is not to me. It has been rendered intermission quies, cessatio. 664. yHY who art inhabiting. Part. Ben. Kal of 3tJ'"' to dwell or in- habit. 665. nibnn the praises of. No change in regim. Rule 26. Plural of 7hr\r\ iiraise. n formative. Rule 189. bSn to praise. 666.'7N"\K'' Israel. From 1K^ afirince^oxid ^N God. Vide Gen.xxxii. 28. The initial ' is frequently formative of proper names, as 3py^ Jacob, from 3p;r to sujijdant. n'DY Jeremiah., from D1 to lift ufi, and n' Jehovah. h^'y^V Jezreel, from ;^nt seed, and bx God. Rule 164. 667. p in thee. 3 in. "] thee. See a similar compound in num. 135. 668. int33 have trusted, od pers. m. plur. pret. Kal of HM to trust. 669. irnax our fathers. 13 our. "MX. Though not fem. yet having the fem. termination, it takes " final after n in construction, and ought to have been included in rule 27. 3N in regim. 'JN plur. niJN andm:;x from n3N to acquiesce in. Vide num. 247. 432. 670. IDaSani and thou didst deliver them. 1 and, con vers. 1?D them. Q^fln 2d pers. sing. masc. fut. Kal of o'7S to deliver. 112 673 :V^n 159 kSI 668 1^02 ^67 -^^ 6^2 '\^^f^y\ 671 ^pyf 117 D-|}^675 risnn 236 1:?*^^ 159 j^Si 674 nySin 294 toij^-i r 304 1^ 679 IJl^y^* 678 ^^'^ 97 ^J 677 :qj7 676 i)^y\ 8 47 *jj^ 683 ^Jj 1 :tj;}^-| 682 ♦j;*^* 681 HSt^^^ 680 ^^^tJ^D* 9 63 nn 686 ysn 25 685 mV^f* 684 ihdSd* 154 nin» 690 »*^^ 13 l^j; 689 ♦n^O^!^ 688 p^D 687 l^^ 430 ^ni* 25 »3 10 688 |l0aO693 DniD 692 ^Djb'^H 691 7^5? 249 j*^}^ 11 671. IpJ?! Mey cried. 3d pers. plur. pret. Kal of pi?] to call or cry. 672. IIsSdJI one/ ^/tey %vere delivered. 1 ant/. 10*70^ 3d pers. plur. pret. Niph. of D^d to deliver. 67^. V^y2 were not confounded. 3d pers. plur. pret. Kal of t^D to confound. For the 1 inserted, vide rule 98. 674. njrbin c ivorm^ and ny^in ai'c nouns fem. i'Vin masc. a loorm^ from ;^S to sxvalloiv. 2 Cor. xiii. 4. 675. nsin a refiroach of. In regim. for DiJinfrom 3"in ro disgrace or reproach, 676. '1131 anrf despised. ^ and. 'ID is the participle Paoul Kal of 7113 ?o despise. Vide rule 103. John xii. 42, 3. 677. D;r ^Ae people. As a particle, together. HDj; nearness. W'Q}} plur. the people. Vide num. 474. 678. 'NT seeing me. " /«?. ^ of 'XI, which is D"XT in construct, coa- lesces in the suffix. It is the plur. of part. Ben. Kal of HNI to see. Num. 24. 679. trrV will laugh. It is the 3d pers. m. plur. fut. Hiphil of JJ^S to deride. Matt. 27, 39. 680. )ya2' will distort. The 3d pers. m. plur. fut. Hiphil of IDS to distort. 681. naE'D with the lip. 2 with, nsty the lip-, speech, margin. As a verb, to stick out, to be craggy. 682. i;?':' they will 7nove. The 3d pers. m. plur. fut. Hiphil of ;>J to shake, or agitate. 113 t) But I am a worm and no man; a reproach of men, and despised of the people. 7 All they that see me, laugh me to scorn, they shoot out the lip, they shake the head, saying., 8 He trusted on the Lord that he would deliver him, let him deliver him seeing he delighted in him. 9 But thou art He who took me out of the womb; thou didst make me hope when I was upon my. mother's breasts. 10 1 was cast upon thee from the womb; thou art my God from my mother's belly. 683. 7JI he trusted. It is the 3d pers. m. sing. pret. Kal. Bythner supposes it to be in the imperat. but the sense suits not so well. 684. inoVs'' he Kvill deliver him. in hiw.. Rule 39. dlB" is the 3d pers. m. sing. fut. Kal of oSi) to deliver. Mat. xxvii. 43. 685. inS'jf he will set him free, in him. h'"i- is the 3d pers. m. sing, fut. Hiphil of h'i^ to deliver. 686. yan he taketh pleasure. Part. Ben. Kal. 1 omitted as usual. To will or choose» 687. ■'na my extractor. "• my, suffix. HJ as a verb, to take out, 688. |£33D/ro7?z the ivomb. "Ofrom. Jt32 the belly. 689. 'n^orirD thou art causing me to trust. ■• me, suff. H'tD^D part. Hi- phil of the verb r\D2 to hope or trust. 690. '''^2f the breasts. A noun in construct, for U^'Vif the plural of "Ity the breast, mty one who Jwurs out, a cupbearer. ^~w a name of De- ity, " all bountiful." 691. •j'-Si' upon thee. "] thee. For S;f vide num. 13. Professor Wilson has justly said, that " all words whatever may be considered either as absolute, or appropriated, as in a general or particular state," ac- cordingly participles and adjectives are often in regimine; so also do particles before suffixes frequently take \ e. g. Sn and S;'; but not before •• the pronominal suffix, as 'Sj; upon me; and some nouns even irregularly, as :3X a father, nx a brother, DH a father in law, and ns the mouth, which changes its n into ■• before a suffix, as "]'£) thy mouth, and in regimine before a noun. 692. 'n^btyn I have been cast. It is the 1st pers. m. sing. prel.. Hiph. of "^Se^ to cast. G93. Dm^/row (he womb. D from. On'l the belli/. As a verb, to niclosr V 114 212 ^j);::;tD 694 pnnn 543 ^^^ 430 jnn« ^57 »«7;s{249 »qh 12 699 ♦jnnD 6^8 :-^tiy ^97 •^x 25 »:> 696 nmp ^^^ nn^ 25 >3" 13 702 :»innD ^^1 ^trn ^^o »'^»:i^ 321 ^^^n 59 o^d 705 tJl^ct:;'! 704 t^'^J^ 458 HHt^ *^91 CDH^Q 691 1^^702 1\f£3 14 708 ♦niDvy ^^ ^73 ^07 nisnm 706 ^n^Dtrj 1^' d^dd 15 711 l^^;^ 36 iin2 710 DD2 ^09 jj^nD 635 »:i^ 20 ^^^ 7i7»nipbD7i6p2"f/t:7i5»:j after the first radical denotes an agent, coming from Ben. Kal, 1 be- fore the last radical implies an effect, or something passive, because it comes from the participle Paoul. Vide rules 158, 159. 699. 'JD^D have surrounded me. 'J me. Rule 34. 133D 3d pers. plur. pret. Kal of 3DD to eiicompass. 700. 'T3X strong bulls of. Sing. I^ax strong, D'T3N in the plural. D"^DN is rendered spmetimes horses, and sometimes bulls, from their strength. 701. jiy^ Bashan. A fertile region, Ez. xxxix. 18. producing large cattle, to which the enemies of Christ are compared. 702. "JnnD have beset 7ne around. 'J nie. nr\D is the 3d pers. m. plur. pret. Kal of in3 to enclose. 703. lim they open their mouths. 3d pers. plur. pret. Kal of Hi'S to let loose, or open, n being dropped, vide rule 102. 704. ^^£3 ravening. Part. Ben. Kal. 1 omitted. Rule 78. As a sub- stantive, p7'ey. As a verb, to tear to pieces. 705. iHW\ and roaring. In the same manner as num. 704. From 1 and, and JNl? to roar. Vide num. 661. 115 1 1 Be not far from me, for trouble is near; for t/iere is none to help. 12 Many bulls have compassed me, strong bulls of Bashan have be- set me round. 13 They gaped upon me ivi(h their mouths as a ravening and a roaring lion. 14 I am poured out like water, and all my bones are out of joint, my heart is like wax, it is melted in the midst of my bowels. 15 My strength is dried up like a potsherd, and my tongue cleaveth to my jaws, and thou hast brought me into the dust of death. 706. "PiDDlifl I have been poured out. First pers. sing. pret. Niphal of laty to fiour out. 707. niSnm and all my bones have separated themselves. 1 and. It is the 3d pers. plur. pret. Hilhp. of T13 to divide. 708. \"\13]fp lyiy bones. " 7nij. D'OV;? or nni:;? plur. o^VTiy a bo?ie. As a verb, to be strong. 709. Jjn:3 as ivax. 3 cs, or like. Jjn wax. Ps. Ixviii. 3. xcvii. 5. 710. DOJ it has been melted. It is the 3d pers. sing, preter Niph. of DDD to melt. T\ is dropped by rule 102. 711. 'j.'O my bowels. "' my. D is dropped in regim. and "• coalesces with the suffix. Not used in the singular. 712. wy has been dried ufi. The 3d pers. m. sing. pret. Kal. To dry J or io be dry. 713. ty^nD like an earthen vessel. 3 as. ^"Ifl earthen. Lev. xi. 33. xiv. 5. 50. Jer. xix. 1, &c. yt Jiotsherd, Job ii. 8. Prov. xxvi. 23, &c. 714. "TID my strength. '' 7ny. r\3 strength. 715. 'JlcySl and my tongue. 1 and. " my. \)]ih a tongue. jtS'b is to sfieak against, lyS is to knead, as dough. 716. pmn is caused to cleave. Part. masc. Ben. Huphal of p3T to adhere, to be dry. John xix. 23. 717. "TUp/D to my jaws. "" my. D is dropped in regim. 'coalesces D'nip^O the ufijier and lower parts of the mouth, fipb to receive. 718. 'jnDtyn thou wilt bring me. 'J me. natJTl 2d pers. masc. sing, fUt. Kal of ns^f to dispose of. il6 726 ^^J-\ 241 ♦n'iDVJ? ^7 «73 391 -|£)DJ< 725 :»»7J|-^T 724 l-Jt 18 ^27 Dn*7 729 »-|;|^ 728 ^p^^n^ 63 li^ 24 ^{^^> 727 ItD^l* ^^' Ml^ ■■■■■■ — I ■■ ■ MM! ■ ■■-■,» ■■- ■ ■ I . ,1 I 719. D''a'7D clogs. Sing, is 3^3 a rfo§-, either from the Arabic to hold fast; or perhaps from 2^2 as the heart, i. e. faithful. Mat. vii. 6. 720. m;^ the assembly of. In construct, for mj^ an assembly, from n;?" fo afifioint, or convene. 721. D';?1D q/'^Ae e^'^7. A noun in the plur. formed of the part. Ben. masc. Huphal of >*"! to break, to produce disorder, to do evil. 722. 'Jia-pn have surrounded me. 'J me. la'DH is the 3d pers. m.plur. pret. Hiphil of f]pJ to surround. Rule 94. 723. ^"^^2 piercing, or the piercers of. A noun, or a Ben. part, plu- ral in regim. agreeing with the noun of multitude m;», from 1X3 to pierce. But the Complutensian, and three manuscripts and two print- ed editions of Dr. Kennicott read it liNO, the 3d pers. plur. pret. Kaf, and so both the Septuagint and Vulgate read it, and so is the Syriac version.* * Solomon Bennett, in his reply (1809) to Lord Crawford's letter to the Hebrew nation, renders this verse thus; " For dogs have compassed me, a multitude of wicked have surrounded me 'ISO like a lion, my hands and feet." And says, " The radical then is "1N a Hon, the 3 then is merely a servile, expressing the comparative like, but our translators and Mr. Parkhurst composed a new radical, i. e. 1X3 t9 pierce, to which we find no similar term in all the Bible, and Hebrew language, the proper radical for it is 7X^2 to pierce, or dig, but not 1X3. This new fabrication of a term was the cause of altering the syntax also; they put the comma after enclosed me, they pierce, 8cc. though according to the proper Hebrew, the stop ought to be after the term "•1X3, but never before it. Secondly, according to the new invention the letter "• in '1X3 does not belong either to a radical or to a servile, and entirely superfluous." Ifni3be the Hebrew word for to pierce, which does not appear from any of the numerous places in which it occurs in the bible, ex- cept /^/erce be taken in the sense of to dig for the purpose of making 117 J 6 For dogs have compassed me; the assembly of the wicked have enclosed me; they pierced my hands and my feet. 17 I may tell all my bones, they look and stare upon me. 18 They part my garments among them; and cast lots upon my vesture. 724. n'' my hands. '' mz/, suffix. H" a hand, plur. WT. D is dropped in reg. and ^ coalesces. From "tW to extend. 725. 'hl^) and my feet. ' my. 1 and. D is dropped in construct, and' coalesces. U^hl") plur. of SjT afoot. As a verb, to strike. 726. nan they. Vide rule 40. 727. )a'T they wiUlook. Third pers. m. plur. fut. Hiphil of t33J to behold. Vide rule 94.* 728. ip^n' they will divide. Third pers. m.plur. fut. Kal of pSn to divide. John xix. 2S, 24. 729. nja my garments. ' viy. D dropped in reg. ^ coalesces. DHJ- garments, nnJ3 hyfiocrisies, each the plural of nJ3 a covering. a well, our translators still would be tolerably supported, for nj, which is the regular 3d pers. m. plur. perf. Kal of that verb, n final being dropped as usual before the servile, is a reading in two of the codices of Kennicott, and in no less than ten of the codices of De Rossi. It is indubitable that 'IXD may be rendered as a lion, as it is often in the Old Testament; but the sense would be incomplete and unin- telligible. It was no doubt this that led the Syriac translators to ren- der it by \^U, the 70 by ue^vlxv, and the Vulgate by foderunt; and ii is extremely incorrect in Mr. Bennett, against the voices of three such ancient versions into different languages, and also against the Arabic and Ethiopic versions, to pronounce the English rendering. they pierced, « a new fabrication." What he observes of the new invention with respect to ' is puerile; he should have explained away, if it was in his power, the instances of the same thing given by Parkhurst, which are only a few of many which occur. * Here is a substituted word in the margin, marked with a p which isfor'-ip (i. e. read) and the place of insertion is as usual distinguish- ed by o placed above the line. The marginal word to be read is n3 they stood around. The 118 154 nin^4r,o nn«i ^32 ji^-^ij 731 -^^^q', no »t^' in construct, for Tn\y assis- tancc. Vide num. 698. The Keri or marginal word is generally the true one, which has been omitted, or changed into the Ketib yT\2 (i. e. written) and has been afterwards supplied, or corrected in the margin through a com- mendable reverence for the text. It hafe been supposed that Ezra was the person who marked these variations, and put them in the margin to be read instead of the words which he found ivritten in the text. But this is not probable, because such marginal readings are also found in the book of which he was the inspired penman. It is remarkable that these various readings are of the consonants only, and not of the vowel points, which seems to show that they are of greater antiquity than the points. In Jer. li. 3. the word pT oc- curs the second time unnecessarily, which is noticed by those who settled the Keri and Ketib, and by them marked not to be read. It has no vowel points, and may be presumed to have had none M'hen such margin was made, othei'wise they would have been preserved as well as the original letters. In Jer. xxxi. 38. the word D'n:) coming is wanting in the text and supplied in the Keri, as usual without points, but in the text a blank space is left for the marginal word, and under the space are placed the vowel points. The fair conclusion seems to be, that the makers of the Keri performed their work be- fore the points were added, and that those who added the points, ha- 119 19 Be not thou far from me, O Lord; O my strength, haste thee to help me. 20 Deliver my soul from the sword; my darling from the power of the dogs. 21 Save me from the lion's mouth; for thou hast heard me from the horns of the unicorn. 735. niyin 7nake hufste. Imper. 2d pers. sing. Kal of tJTl to hasten. Vide rule 98. n paragogic. 736. nS'':fn deliver. 7\ paragogic. Vi'H 2d pers. sing. masc. imper. Hiphil of S:;j. Vid. num. 685. 737. 'nTIT' my united one. ' my. nTn"" in reg. noun fem. from "in'' to unite. Christ is prophetically represented here speaking of himself; this word may therefore refer to the union either of his body with his soul, or of his human with his divine nature, for the words which precede and follow forbid a reference to a third person. 738. 'Jj^'iyin save me. "i me. Rule 34. y)^'\D\r\ is the 2d pers. m. sing. imperat. Hiphil of ^'jy' to save. ' into 1. Vide rule 89. 739. ''3"ipm and from the horns of. 1 and. Dfrom. "J'lp in construct, for D'Jip sing, pp a horn. Hence cornu, and horn. 740. CD") unicorns. More than thirty of Dr. Kennicott's books read D''r3N*> horned animals. Parkhurst supposes bulls. D'T or DXI is the sing, from D") or DNT to exact. ving adopted the principle of not interfering with the Keri, placed their vowels where the marginal word should be introduced. If the Keri and Ketib be older than the vowel points, and were not known to the Seventy, Josephus, «Origen or Jerome, which seems evident enough, then the antiquity of the points must be later than all those writers. It seems a probable conjecture that the Keri and Ketib were ad- justed by the Masorites of Tiberias, Avho were certain Jewish gram- marians who revised the Hebrew text, and to guard against corrup- tions in future, numbered the sections, words and letters in each book. Vide Jennings' Jewish Antiquities. 120 97 Sd 526 -,^^3)3 747 nijii 746 inniD 745 :ipv» 57 y«^t 748 YpK^ 159 ^^) 676 HO 159 ««7 23 ♦^ 666 :»7«-)t:^» 57 y«^T 25 526 liJ^O 14 *Vit) 750 -^^nOn 159 fc{»7l 749 ^J? 749 nii^ 754 >nbnn 753 -|n«D 752 jy^Dt:? 333 vb>? 751 lyitc^ii 26 744 jv^n* 757 njii 756 dSi^k 755 nni 321 :i-) 742 ^^p^ 154 nin* 743 iSbn» ^59 ly^^trn 758 D»ii5;259 ^^^^^^ 27 741. 'jnu;? Mo« Acsr /tecrc? me. 'J we. n^J;? for nnj;>. Vide rule 102. It is the 2d pers. sing. pret. Kal of W}? to hear or answer. 742. Stx^ congregation. From Snp to assemble. Heb. ii. 12. 743. ^SSni? I will praise thee. "] thee. SShn first pers. sing. fut. Kal of bSn to praise. Postea HiTS 2d pers. plur. imper. Kal. 744. ""KT ye fearers of. Part. Ben. Kal in construct, plur. for D'Xir from XT to fear. 1 dropped. Vide rule 77. 745. 'SDT Jacob, from 3p;^ to lay hold on the heel. Gen. xxv. 26. xxvii. 36. Hos. xii. 4. 746. inn3D glorify him. in him. V^^D 2d pers. plur. imperat. Kal of n3D to honour. 747. nui and be afraid. 1 and. nU is the 2d pers. plur. imp. Kal of 1U to fear. 748. ypU' abhorred. 3d pers. sing. m. pret. Kal, to abominate^ or de- test, as a serpent. 749. T\My! the affliction. A noun'fem. And the noun "3;^ afflicted. from nj;> ^o afflict, affect. This seems rather to be niJ;r humility in x*e- gim. otherwise this is a solitary instance of TSM'^ for affliction. * The 1 in VJ3 and unD relates to different antecedents. Mr. Blay- ney observes on Jer. ii. 3. that " n is in use for the masculine affix as well as 1, and seems often to be purposely introduced for the sake of distinguishing between two masculine pronouns in the same pe,' vied, which refer to different antecedents." 121 22 I will declare thy name unto my brethren; in the midst of the congregation will 1 praise thee. 23 Ye that fear the Lord praise him; all ye the seed of Jacob glo- rify him, and fear him all ye the seed of Israel. 24 For he hath not despised nor abhorred the affliction of the af- flicted; neither hath he hid his face from him; but when he cried unto him he heard. 25 My praise shall be of thee in the great congregation; 1 will pay my vows before them that fear him. 26 The meek shall eat and be satisfied; they shall praise the Lord that seek him; your heart shall live for ever. 750. Tnon he hath not hidden. It is the 3d pers. m. sing. pret. Hi- phil of "ino to hide. 751. \^'Wyi and in crying unto him. 1 and, pref. 1 Afm, sufF. 3 r«, pref.;;ity infin. Kal, (or part. Num. 19) to cry aloud. 752. )}mf he heard. It is the 3d pers. m. sing. pret. Kal. 753. *|nND of thee. "] thee. m'Ofrom with, from the. Of n pref. and nx ivith, tO) towards, or expletive. Vide num. 4. 754. "nSnn my praise. "• my. nSnn in regim. iovTh7]t\ firaisCy from '7Sn to honour. 755. ^T\'i my vows. ^ my. 113 a vow, from 113 to vow. 756. oStyN I will perform. It is the first pers. sing. fut. Kal of dSb? to perform, or complete. 757. "!J3 before. A particle, in the presence of. As a verb in Hiphil to make viaiiifest. Vide num. 297. 758. DMJJ? the humble. Plural of u;' humble, from 7M)} to hear, or af- fict. 759. )};2W' and shall be satisfied. It is the 3d pers. m. plur. fut. Ni- phal of J^aty to satisfy. 760. VB?*n the seekers of him. 1 him. "K^n in regim. for W^M part Ben. Kal in the plur. »n to seek. Q 122 498 n3r» ''fis t^fy 635 tDDn:iV ''61 ♦n* ^eo vtyn^i 7 V'^t* 613 ♦Dl3^e 97 <73 154 nin» ^ss «7^ 763 i:itj^iT 582 jcDnj 765 rnnDc^D ^r «:j3 u y^f^^ 764 •nnnc'n :CDn:in ^^r Su^idi ^^^ n^iSan 154 nm**? 25 13 I /I 29 38 jntry 25 1^ 775 n'^ij 677 oy*? 774 ^j-ipT:; 773 n»:i»i 761. TT shall live. Third pers. sing. fut. Kal of n'n to live. Vide rule 102. 762. y^h forever. S prefix. '\^ futurity ^ ox forever. 763. i:ijy'1 cTzrf sAc// 6^ converted. The 3d pers. m. plur. of Kal or Niphal of .:ty to turn. Vide rule 98. 13B'"' cannot be understood in this passage of a change of place; this change is to result from a remem- brance not of any ancient empire, revolution, or other historical event, but of Jehovah: this is therefore a plain prophecy of a return of the Gentiles to the worship of the true God, whom they had long forsaken. 764. 1innt7"1 and shall bow themselves. 1 pref. and. ))r\nw for 1iniyn\ R. 82. 3d pers. m. plur. fut. Hithpael of nnU' to bow. This verb is irre- gular, according to the old grammars, because it always takes 1 in Hithpael after the second radical. But it is not alone, see hhi in rule 111. See this word ante in num. 457. 765. rms^}^ families^ plur. of nnsiyp a household. Fromnsiy to be subject. 766. n^^Snn the kingdom. H emphat. n^lSa a kingdom^ from ^Sd to reign. The derivatives in most use are *jbD a king, HdSd a queen, ni3'?n a kingdom, plur. nr^So kingdoms, but r\jbn, n^SoD, and niD^D also respectively signify a kingdom. Vide num. 586. 123 27 All the ends of the world shall remember, and turn unto the Lord; and all the kindreds of the nations shall worship before thee. 28 For the kingdom is the Lord's, and he is the governor among the nations. 29 All t/iey that be fat upon the earth shall eat and worship: all they that go down to the dust shall bow before him; and none cati keep alive his own soul. 30 A seed shall serve him, it shall be accounted to the Lord for a generation. 3 1 They shall come, and declare his righteousness unto a people that shall be born, that he hath done this. ■■ ■ ' ■ — - — ' — ■■ . - I. ■ I ■ ■ ■■■II I ■ II ■■■— i.^. „ , ^ . ^ .■ — — .11 ■■■— . » ,■■—. ■ I I IB 767. StJ'im and the ruler. 1 and. '7U'1D a noun, or the part. Ben. Kal of IWa to govern. 768. "JiJ^n the fat of. Plur. in regim. of jl^l to fatten. Jarchi inverts the words, they shall eat, i. e. the meek shall eat, all the fat of the earth, atid nvorshiji; the meek shall enjoy the blessings of providence, and also of grace. 769. i;?"lD"' shall bend thetnselves. 3d pers. plur. fut. Kal of;r*iD to in- cline, or bend one's self. 770. mr they who go down into. Part. Ben. Kal, plux'. in regim. of TT to descend. 771. yi^^for a generation, h for. in and "n, plur. Dnn masc. nnn fem. from "n to go round. 772. 'xn"- they shall go. It is the 3d pers. m. sing. fut. Kal of N3 to go, or to come. 773. )Tr) and they shall declare. ) and. )Vr is the 3d pers. plur. m. fut. Hiph. of njj not used in Kal. Num. 297. 774. inpn^f his righteousness. 1 his. npli' in regim. for Dpli' righte- ousness. Vide num. 396. 775. n^U to be born. Part. Ben. Niphal of nV to beget. ^ is changed into }. Vide rule 89. 124 ISAIAH XI. rSlVtS^llTD 780 ^^^^ 779 »{j;» 778 yiJi;^ 777 "^^n 776 \^'^s) I 16 nn 154 nin» "^ nn 13 v*?3? 733 nmi 732 jn^is* 3 16 rm 787 nnujii 786 n-^fp ^^ nn ^ss nym ''84 ^ddh '^88 n«n»a 789 -innni 154 jnin» ^ss n«nn 132 nn 3 776. NS'1 and shall spring forth. 1 and,, conversive. NJC to come or go forth, is the third pers. m. sing. pret. Kal. 777. "iDn a rod, or ttvig. This is a noun masc. used only in one other place, viz. Prov. xiv. 3. Sept. VxZloi. Vulg. Virga. 778. i^WOfrom the stock, r^from. Vide rule 176. ;?n a stock or ste?n. Job xiv. 8. Isa. xl. 24. Sept. Pi^jj. Vulg. Be radice. 779. "ty Tifsse, the father of David, 1 Sam. xvii. 12. Perhaps it is from ty substance, riches (of Hty to exist) and ■• my, the suffix. 780. ni*:i and a branch. 1 anrf. *ii'J a noun, from *i:!;j to guard, or /» preserve. A scion is so denominated, because it grovi^s near, and guards the tree, or because it is preserved when the tree is taken away. This is also the name for Nazareth, and he was called a Na- zarene. Isa. iv. 2. Jer. xxiii. 5. Zech. iii. 8. vi. 12. 781. ymi:f:2from his roots, ^from. Rule 176. 1 his. Rule 39. 'JJ/T^ in construction before 1. Rule 24. For D'tyicy plural of ^'W a root, which as a verb signifies either to take root, or to root Jifi. Also the sole of the foot, or bottom of the sea. 782. ma"* shall grow. -It is the 3d pers. masc. sing. fut. Kal of ma produce. Vide num. 59. 783. nn^l and shall rest. ) convers. Num. 19. n. It is the third pers. fem. sing. pret. Kal of n3 to rest, or settle. 784. nODn "wisdom. A noun fem. from DDn to be luise, to instruct, fo be prudent. 125 ISAIAH XI. 1 And there shall come forth a rod out of the stem of Jesse, and a JBranch shall grow out of his roots. 2 And the Spirit of the Lord shall rest upon him, the spirit of wis- dom and understanding, the spirit of counsel and might, the spirit of knowledge and of the fear of the Lord; 3 And shall make him of quick understanding in the fear of the Lord, and he shall not judge after the sight of his eyes, neither, re- prove after the hearing of his ears. 785. nr3 discernment, or understanding. A noun fern, from p to sefiaratef to distinguish. In Hiphil, to teach. 786. nx;^ counsel. A noun fem. from l'^" to advise. In Niph. to considt. In Hiph. to take counsel together.* 787. mi3J1 and strength. 1 and. nil^J might, victory. A noun fem. {voxcv'^2\ to be strong. Rules 153, 159. 788. nXTI and the fear of. 1 and. HNT reverence, fiietij, in construct. nXT. Rule 26. From J?T to fear, to reverence. nxiO is the same, with the particle 2. Rule 148. * The word riDDn expresses such an application of knowledge as excludes rashness and impropriety of conduct, a trait of character perfect only in Jesus Christ, nra signifies that accuracy of discern- ment by which the Saviour penetrated into the motives of men's ac- tions; thus he knew Peter, Judas, and Thomas better than they did themselves. Vi^^ expresses his capacity for instructing men in the will of God, and the way of happiness. mn:> denotes that divine power and authority which accompanied him, and which he exercis- ed as often as he chose, n^n must be taken, because in regimine, with mn"', and therefore signifies his knowledge of God; this he claimed exclusively, because he had come from the Father. nXT is to be also connected with mn" for the same reason, and denotes that reverence which he always observed as subjected to the law, and bound to perform all righteousness, and that piety which was obser- vable in his conversation and devotions. 126 !59 ^J<71 r92 tjiutyt 791 vi»y 790 nt«^D*7 159 j^s^ 154 nin» 396 p-iyi 79:2 ;^Q^^ 795 :n»^V ^94 VJttt 793 y^t^^^b ^ 800 HDHI ' X'y^ 799 t^^ytj 798 -nt^^^j^l 7^7 nOIHI 796 t3>bl 805 D»^» 804 vn£)t!^ 303 nnni 802 vd soi ont^^i 7 ^n^ 809 ^i^D^?m sos v^DD 807 -^^jj^ 396 p1^;2o n»n"l soe jytj^*^ 5 789. IIT'^ni and his smelling^ or his quick discerninent shall be. 1 a7id> 1 suff. Rule 39. n"in may be a noun formed of the third pers. m. sing. Jbliphil of T\^ to smell, but it is more probably the infin. of Hiph» used with the suffix. Vide rules 140, 141. 790. HNinS after the sight of. h prefixed. Rule 175. The regimen here is discernible only by the juxta-positionofthe two nouns, which is an exception to rule 26. in some instances. nx^D asfiecty sights a noun from HNI to see, with D formative. Rule 178. 791. Viy his eyes. 1 his. Rule 39. Tj? in construct, rule 24. for CJ'J? the plur. of \y an eye. The root is riJ;; to reflect. 792. Diaiy shall judge. 1 is inserted by rule 77. It is the third pers. m. sing. fut. Kal of tOSiy to judge, order, regulate. 793. ^^O'^fcb after the hearing of. h vide rule 175. prefix. D forma- tive. Rule 178. ;'?3"kyo hearing, from V^'^ff to hear. 794. rjix his ears. 1 his. Rule 39. 'JIX in regim. Rule 25. D'JIN plur. ef JTX an ear. As a verb, to weigh, to consider. 795. n'3r shall refirove. The radical ' is changed into 1 by rule 89. It is the 3d pers. ra. sing. fut. Hiph. of ny to show, to rebuke, &c. 796. D'Sl the jioor. It is the plur. oihl fioor, fromH^T to exhaust. 797. n'Dim and shall refirove. 1 convers. Num. 19. H'JDin is the 3d pers. m. sing. pret. Hiphil of r\y to rebuke. Rule 89, for ' into ). 798. "lliy'OD in equity. 2 in. IWD rectitude, from T^' to make even. Hence the woi'd Jasher, Joshua x. 13. ID'H "13D the correct, or authen^ tic book. Parkh. 799. 'M^hfor the humble, ^for. '«;• in construct, for D'1J>' plur. of *H* lowly, from TMy to act upon, depress. 127 4 But "with righteousness shall he judge the poor, and reprove with equity for the meek of the earth; and he shall smite the earth with the rod of his mouth, and with the breath of his lips shall he slay the wicked. 5 And righteousness shall be the girdle of his loins, and faithfulness the girdle of his reins. 800. HDni and he shall strike. 1 conver. HDH is theHiph. 3d pers. m. sing. pret. of n33 to smite. "• dropped. Rule 81. J also. Rule 94. 801. £332/3 nvith the rod, or scefitre of. Perhaps t^ is used for y, be- cause t)33f is to stretchforth. Lowth after Houtagant reads it n3l^3 by the blast of his mouth, from 31J'J to blonv. It is not a sufficient reason for the change of £3 into n that the Septuagint use hoyo^ here, for they aimed at the sense, and were probably guided by the nn3 in the next member. The word of God is the weapon of the Spirit. 802. rs his mouth. 1 his. Rule 39. "'3 in regim. of ns a mouth. 803. nn31 and with the breath. 1 and. 3 ivith. nn breathy s^iirit. Vide num. 16. He was not to be a temporal prince. 804. YT\^'i/ his lifts. 1 his. nsi^ to crush, hence as a noun, the lip, in regim. n3if plural D*nDK', of which D is in this case dropped in con- struction: or to the fern, plural Ts\i^^ there is postfixed ■" in regim. like vmin his laws. Vide rule 27. 805. fi'D' he shall slay. It is the 3d pers. m. sing. fut. Hiph. of the verb no to die, in Hiphil to kill. 806. ^VJ'\ the wicked. It signifies unjiistj injustice, to be unjust^ and to overcome. 807. "ys]^ a girdle. From "IIX to surround. Vide rule 159 for the formative 1 after the second radical. 808. VJHD his loins. 1 his. "'JHO in regim. for D'jno the loins, a plural noun from {no in Arab, to be firm. 809. nJIDNH) ayid faithfulness. 1 and. H emphat. Rule 1 50. HJI'^X faithfulness^ from \mi faithful. pN to make steady. 128 «19 «nD1 8 '8 T5D1 ^03 S:yi 817 y:i«^» 816 ^^^ 81S Qj; 824 yi) 39 n«-|51 823 tj^:! 822 ^jH^ 82 ^p 82 1 ^^^y) 820 ^H* 7 458 nn«i 826 ]nnS» 817 -jv^^-^* 820 nn» 325 ni»nn 13 »73> 830 p^^» 829 ytyytS^I 828 Jpfj 259 ^J^JJI 827 ^p:^2 8 810. rjfSn Ms loins. ^ his. ":fSn for D'JfSn which denotes the same part before called D"'JnD, but for a different reason, the root ySn being /o loosen. The loins were thus denominated variously, because strong zndjiexible. 811. 1J1 anrf sfia// cfwf//. 1 convers. Num. 19. *i; is the 3d pers. m. sing. pret. Kal, and signifies to sojourn. 812. 3KT a ivolf. This word is supposed to signify impetuosity. It occurs seven times in the scriptures, but always in the same sense as in this place. 813. D;^ with. A particle signifying also zn, againsty asy near^as long as, and when. As a noun, fieo/ilej society. 814. ^23 the lamb. From lif22 to subdue or humble. 815. *1D31 and the leofiard. ^ and. 1DJ a leojiard or fiant her. In Chal- dee and Arabic "IDJ signifies to variegate. 816. ■'HJ a kid. From ^il to assault, or rusA ujion. The plur. 1 Sam. X. 3. is D^nJ fem. in regim. Cant. i. 8. TinJ. 817. y3T sAa// /ze down. It is the 3d pers. m. sing, fut, Kal of pi to couch, and agrees with inj. Rule 127. Postea 1X3T is the 3d pers. xn. plur. fut. Kal. 818. TSD a young lion, a covert lion. A noun from "ISD to cover, and in a secondary sense to atone, or exfiiate. 819. K'^ni cnrf the falling. From J^ID ?o raise, or swell. ' formative after the second radical. Vide rule 165. 820. rwr together. A particle from in' to urate, and 1 collective. Rule 162. Vide num. 737. 821. i;?J1 cnt/ c child. 1 cwrf. "U'J as a noun, a c/«Vcf, a simfile one. Also fierturbation. As a verb, ^o agitate. 129 -J 6 The wolf also shall dwell with the lamb, and the leopard shall lie down with the kid; and the calf and the young lion, and the falling together; and a little child shall lead them. 7 And the cow and the bear shall feed, their young ones shall lie down together: and the lion shall eat straw like an ox. 822. jnj shall lead. It is the 3d pers. m. sing. pret. Kal, and is converted to a future by the foregoing 1. Vide num. 19, n, 823. D3 together with (hem. 2 prefix, in, ivith, to, &c. D a pronominal suffix, plur. 3d pers. masc. Rule 40. 824. 3ni and the bear. 1 and. 3T or 3n a bear, from 3T to grumble^ because it growls. 825. nrj?in shall feed. It is the third pers. fern. plur. fut. Kal of n;;i to feed, the n final being changed into "' as is usual before a ser- vile in verbs Lamed He; vide rule 102. See also rule 130, for its be- ing in the plural, preceded by two nouns in the singular. If 3T be masculine, as it is usually connected with a masculine adjective, then according to rule 129 this verb should have been masculine; but the language of the rule justly admits of exceptions; or as we have D'^T in 2 Kings ii. 24, for she-bears, it may be feminine in this place. Vide p. 23 ante in note. 826. \ivh^ their young ones. \T\ is a pronominal fern. suff. of the 3d pers. in the plur. Rule 41. nV in regim. for DnV plur. of nV which as a noun is the young of any creature. As a verb, is to pro- create. 827. 1p33 OS en ox. 2 as. Rule 173. As a noun, the ynorning, a beeve. As a verb, to survey. Vide num. 33. 828. pn straw. The root is uncertain. This noun often occurs, and is always rendered straw, stubble, or chajff^, 829. V^i^W) and shall play. 1 convers. Num. 19.;?ti*>'Sy 3d pers. m. sing. pret. Kal, to turn oneself, to s/iort. 830. pjr the sucking child. A noun from the Part. Ben. Kal of pJ' to suck. R 130 834 ^^^2i 833 »J^yB\f 76 HIIKD ^- hV) ^32 ^^D ^31 ^H 837 in*nK^» 159 ^^) 836 -jy-^^ 159 ^^^ 835 tHlH ^52 IT ^ 182 nn 7p?^n 107 nsbo ^5 o 607 ^ti^-^p ess -^n 97 S^n 20 n»ni 839 jD^DDD 18 D>b 18 c)^^3 154 rr\r]'' ^ n« 1^ 841 toy 40 t(^J^ 779 1tJ^» 781 \^^^ 840 J^^nH ^0 DVIl 845 nn\1^ 844 ^ty*^'^* 843 ^)'\^ 383 ^^i^ ^77 Q^I^J? 842 }^^^ 847 nu3 846 inmD 831. "^n a /jo/e. From in (o be white, because it transmits the rays. 832. jns an asp. It is four times rendered as/i, twice adder, and eight times threshold. Its derivation is uncertain. 833. ''Jl;^s3i* the cockatrice. It is so rendered also in Isa. lix. 5. So n^JJ^aif Jei*. viii. 17. and J?DX Isa. xiv. 29. "J;r3:f an adder, Prov. xxiii. 32. Dr. Lowth calls it in this place the basilisk, the Vulgate, and Montanus, regulus, Junius -vifiera, the Septuag. the young ccnirtg. 834. SlOJ the weaned child. Part. Paoul Kal, of ^OJ to wean, edii- catCy return. Isa. xxviii. 9. Also a camel. 835. mn shall extend. It is the 3d pers. m. sing. Kal, rendered future by the next preceding 1. The learner may notice to distinguish from this word mn to conceive, mn to rejoice, and mn to be injlamed, to fret. 836. 1;>T shall not hurt. It is the 3d pers. m. plur. fut. Kal of ;?1 to desiroij or break. Vide num. 183. 837. in"'nty'' and shall not cause destruction. It is the 3d pers. masc, plur. fut. Hiph. of nnii' to mar, or destroy. 838. *^n a mountain. A noun from mn to swell. 1"in a high moun- Sain. Vide num. 606. 839. D'DJO are\ coveri77g, that is, cover. Part. Ben. Hiph. in the plur. agreeing with D'D, from r\D3 to cover. The n final is dropped before a servile. Rule 102. And ' before n final is sometimes omitted in verbs Lamed He. Vide rule 103, and its note. 840. Xinn that, n emphat. Rule 150, and Kin he, she it, a pron. 131 S And the sucking child shall play on the hole of the asp, and the weaned child shall put his hand on the cockatrice' (oi' adder's) den. I 9 They shall not hurt nor destroy in all my holy mountain: for the oarth shall be fuJl of the knowledge of the Lord, as the waters cover the sea. 10 And in that day there shall be a root of Jesse, which shall stand for an ensign of the people; to it shall the Gentiles seek; and his rest shall be glorious. Rule 32. But here it is demonstrative, not primitive. Rule 29. From Kin to be. 841. '\'0)^ standings that is, shall be. Part. Ben. Kal. 1 omitted by- rule 78. Some manuscripts have iDi;;. Of the verb nDJ? to stand. 842. \^lhfor a statidard. ^for. DJ an ensign, a Jtight, as a noun, but as a verb, to glitter, tojiee away. 843. D'U the nations. Plur. of U a society, a body, or of 'U. Vide num. 426. 844. ikyn' shall seek. It is the third pers. masc. plur. fut. Kal of ^')'\ to inquire of, or after. 845. nn'ni and his rest shall be. It is the 3d pers. fem. sing. pret. Kal of n^n to be, H final being changed into n before n servile. Vide rules 102, 103. The 1 is conversive. Vide the note to num. 19. 846. innJO his rest, or oblation. 1 his. Rule 39. TsXWd in construction before 1. Rule 24. The noun is nniD which is often rendered by offering, and oblation, but most frequently by 7neat offerings and some- times by the ■word sacrifice. nJ?D is of the same signification and per« haps the root. I take the word nnio, when it signifies rest, which is much less frequent, to be a participial noun from V\l (or nu, which is the same) and so to be radically distinct from the former. But the Septuagint have rendered this word ccvxjrxvartg, and they have been generally followed; yet the Vvilgate has it sefiulchrum, and Gattaker says that several of the ancients agree with this. The reader must decide for himself, remembering that Rom xv. 12 is a New Testament authority for applying this prophecy to Christ. 847. "[^22 glory, or glorious. From 133 to honour, is^so glory. Tlie 1 after the second radical is a participial formative, giving it some- thing of the force of the past tense. Vide rule 159. Then it will be,. f' And his sacrifice shall be honoured, or held in estimation." 132 ISAIAH XXXV. 852 nn^y 851 ^^r\^ SSO ^♦^f1 849 ^21^ 848 }OW^^ 1 351 •jjni 853 nnsn s^s n^io 854 :nSvnnD 853 ppcjm 2 IS4 ^rii 857 pn'7n 847 -J«|2D 856 p-|T 85 i riS»i 8 , p^{^ 862 1X1* 86 1 nan 860 ptrHI 859 bO'^^H 858 ^H ^27 * ^^ 848. Dliya/"' 6/i«// *e glad. VDS)^ is the 3d pers. m. plur. fut. Kal of W]0 to rejoice. Vide rule 98. for the omission of a middle 1, which some manuscripts have here. D is the pronominal suffix, rule 40,/or them^ that is, for the judgments denounced in the former chapLer. Some suppose the D to be a mistake in transcribing; others, that it is merely paragogic, since no respect to it seems to have been paid by the Septuagint, Vulgate, Sec. Montanus nevertheless has gaude- bunt in eis; it was defective only in one of Kennicott's codices, viz. in No. 321. 849. 1310 t/ie wilderness. A noun. D formative, and "13T to d)'ive or feadi a place to which cattle are led to feed. 850. rry a desert. A noun, plur. nv^f and D^X dry places. '^ a s/iifi, plur. D'^f . |V2f a dry filace, mount Zion. 85 1. bir\) and shall rejoice. ) conjunct. Sjn is the 3d pers. fem. sing, fat. Kal of Sj to roll, or exult. It agrees with n3"i;\ Hence Su, Vj, and fem. nS'J and nS'J exultation. Rule 193. 852. niV . 352Dn*864iptn863Ji:j»nS}*858'^^n 1 54 n^n» 847*1^13 3 869 p;2« 868 :i^f^^ 867 PlSt^^D 866 D^^m 865 HIS^ 4, 133 r\:^^ 873 -ix-n^n 47 «:>j^ 37^'pt^ sn nS s/o^-^noiS 192 }^in 3 D^n'^t^ 8^6 «71^J, 875 ^-i^^ S74 tDDi 853 D3>nh»fc« 267 iyy 879 n:)np£)n 878 ^^^ 377 ^rD2vti;^^ 8^ 5 «u» 5 878 t5« 883 :ninnDn882 a'znn 881 ♦jt«"i 880 oniy 863. irnSx 02ir God. '•nSN in construction for D^nSx. Rule 24, 25. 13 a pronominal suffix, plur. 1st pers. Rule 35. So it is used with DD your. Vide rule 37. 864. ipm strengthen ye. It is the 2d pers. masc. plur, imperat. Kal of pTn to make strong. 865. n^an weak. It is the plur. of r\2r\ feeble, an adjective from n3*l to relax. How put with D'T" vide rule 114. It is pi'obable that the fern, is here twico joined with masculines to express moi'e effective- ly the diminution of strength, as a masculine adjective is used with a fern, noun to augment the force of the former. Vide p. 23, 24, n. 866. D'3121 and the ktiees. ) and. "pi to kneel. Hence as a noun, the knee, plur. D'3'13 the knees. 867. niSt^D tottering. h^ifD to totter. Hence the adjective, or rather part. Ben. Kal, nSiyiD, and rejecting ) by rule 78, rhw:i plur. mbl^D. For the use of the fcm. here, see num. 865. 868. IXDX make strong. It is the second pers. plur. masc. imperat. Kal of 1'DN to invigorate. 869. IIDN saij ye. It is the 2d pers. masc. plur. imperat. Kal of "IDX. Vide num. 19. 870. nnoiS to the hastened of. S to. Rule 175. nnaJ is the particip. Ben. Niphal, plur. in regim. of iriD to hasten. 871. nS heart. The same as 3Dh, which is from 33S to move, or toss. ^ Si» '^y^ to sjieak comfortably. 871. ipin be strong. It is the 2d pers. masc. plur. imperat. Kal of p;n to be strong. It is used in the Niphal sense. 873. IXTn/ear. It is the second pers. masc. plur. imper. Kal of >{T to fear, n is prefixed to the imper. of verbs defective m Pe Yod. ride rule 89. 135 3 Strengthen ye the weak hands, and confirm the feeble knees. 4 Say to them that are of a fearful heart, Be strong, fear not: be- hold, your God will come with vengeance, even God iviih a recom- liensej he will come and save you. 5 Then the eyes of the blind shall be opened, and the ears of the deaf shall be unstopped. 874. Dpi taking vengeance. It is the participle Ben. Kal of Dp3 to avenge. Vide rules 95 and 78. It is regularly Niphai, as the future in dus of the Latins, to be avenged. 875. NIT or W shall come. Rule 98. It is the Sd pei's. masc. sing, fut. Kal of N3 to come, or go. 876. 71DJ recompensed. It may be the particip. Paoul masc, sing. Kal of 4dj. See note on rule 71. 877. 0D;?tJ'"'1 and save you. 1 and, conjunct. DD you. Rule 27.}}]^'' to save. It is the 3d pers. masc. sing. fut. Kal. Rule 90. 878. tN then. A particle. Also 7ioiv, immediately. txrD or TN \:^from that time. 879. njnpan shall be opened. It is the third pers. fem. plur. fut. Niphai of np£3 to open. Vide num. 280. 880. D'li;; blind. A noun plur. of *1U*. When it agrees with DTiT not in regim. the sense is different; thus nmj; tTT'^ is blind eyes. 881. ""JINl and the ears. 1 and. 'JIN is in regim. plur. of JIN the ear, which signifies as a verb, to weigh. The old grammars make a dual of feminines by adding D"", and n where it is final is changed into n. Natural pairs, though they have the plural in D% are generally femi- nine. There are so many exceptions to the rules for genders drawn from the termination, that a modern grammar makes nouns in D' plur. of the first, and in ni of the second declension. Nouns which de- note females, also names of places, cities, countries, Sec. and of na- tural pairs, as eyes, ears, &c, together with those which end in n or n are for the most part feminine, all others are genei-ally of the mas- culine gender; except nnx fathers, wm women, D''tyj'?i} concubines, cSm ewes, &c. 882. D-'K'in the deaf. Plur. of jynn deaf, a noun. As a verb to be deaf, or to devise secretly. 883. runnan shall be opened. It is the 3d pers. fem. plur. fut. Ni- phai of nna to open, or loose. 136 715 \)\ify 886 pni 885 HDA 406 ^^^^ '884 ^^y 18 EDO 366 nniDl 888 Ijjp^^ 25 t^ 887 f^^^^ S95 CD^jn 894 nm 18 O^Q 893 tyUOS 8^2 |1^^^f^ 190 CDjj; 342 n^ni 899 :«d:ii 898 njp^ 397 -^^^n 896 nNfn") » 243 ^-,p» 499 t5^«^pn 548 '^^*^) * 548 1-)-|«| 900 Sl*7DJD 884. jSt «Aa// /ec/2. It is the 3d pers. masc. sing. fut. Kal oi ihl to lea/ij or bound. 885. nOD the lame man. Also the fiassdver, the fiaschal lamb, the fias- chal feast. As a verb, to pass or leap over. 886. pni a/zJ «/!c// move freely^ says Parkhurst, following- the Sep- tuagint and Vulgate; thus the root is p, and it is the 3d pers. fem. sing. fut. Kal. But it will be, shall stngy if it be for pin from pi to sing, or rejoice. Num. 856. Yet pi, though it occurs more than fifty times, does not in any instance, except this be one, drop its final }, unless a servile follow, and is therefore scarcely an exception from rule 105. 887. dSn the dumb. A noun from dSk to compress. Also a sheaf, an arch, a band of men. 888. ll'pSJ have been broken forth. It is the 3d pei*a. masc. plur. indie. Niphal of ^'pa to burst, or divide. 889. cSnJI and streams. 1 and. Plur. of Sn3 a torrent, or valley, from J formative. Rule 1 84, and Sn to pierce. Or perhaps Taylor is right, who supposes it the same with SnJ to possess, but in a different sense. 890. y\1ST\ the parched ground, n emphat. yw occurs but in Isa. xlix. 10, besides this place; it comes probably from "^liy to bum, 3 and «] being both labials, and letters of the same organ are sometimes thus substituted. 891. ni'nh for a fiool.h for. DiH a pond. X formative, rule 147, and Ql a particle signifying abundance, vioreover, also, even, repeated, as well as. * One "jim only is found in the Syriac, in sixteen of Kennicott's, ^nd two of De Rossi's codices. 137 6 Then shall the lanie man leap as an hare, and the tongue of the dumb sing; for in the wilderness shall waters break out, and streams in the desert. 7 And the parched ground shall become a pool, and the thirsty land springs of water; in the habitation of dragons, where each lay, shall be grass with reeds and rushes. 8 And an highway shall be there, and a way, and it shall be called 892. jlX-Di'l and thirsty ground. 1 and. pxoi" is a noun from XDlf to thirst, thirstij, thirst. Vide rule 186. 893. y)2T2h for s/irings.hfor. Rule 175. ;'Da a fountain. Here it is plur. in regim. From;7:jj to gush. Rule 178, for D formative. 894. niJ3 in the habitation of. 3 in. niJ masc. a house, fold, stable, den. As?a verb, to reside. Not changed in regiminc. Rule 25. 895. D'Jn dragons. Plur. of fH a servient, a -vijier, from Hin to hiss. D'Jn is also sing, from |n and D' a sea-dragon. 896. nV3T the resti?tg /ilace of each, n is the pronominal suffix, and |*3T a noun, according to our translation. The Vulgate has, " In cu- bilibus, in quibus dracones habitabant, orieturviror calami et junci." The Septuagint, " Exh tvcp^otrvjn e^veav, i'^avhug y.ctXctf^H xxi £/«." *' The reedy beds and the pools there will be the joy of birds." (Mr. Thompson.) Dr. Lowth has, " And in the haunt of dragons shall sp.ring forth, " The grass, with the reed and the bulrush." Dr. Kennicott's first codex had at first DV31, but the authority fov any change of the letters or words is too weak. I would propose only to join the PI with the next word, and it will read thus, niJ3 in the habitation q/'D"Jn servients ]^:31 hath lain (that is shall lie) TiTin the grass nJpS instead of the cane NDJ1 and bulrush. For this sense of }*3"i see Gen. xlix. 25, and Isa. liv. 1 1. 897. T2fn grass. As a verb, to surround; also a court, which was surrounded by the house, and covered with grass. 898. T\:^Thfor the cane. hfor. Rule 175. HJp reed, or cane, from HJp to measure, the cane being used for this purpose. 899. NDJ1 and bulrush. 1 and. NDJ the Egyfitian reed^ Job viii. 11. It, grew in mud and water. NDJ to absorb. 900. SiSdd a highway. A participial noun from SSs to ratue veru, high. The root isbD to raise up. Rules 159. 178. S 138 9 9 903 •)jt:«7 192 ^J-)-^^ 902 ^^tD ^oi i^nnv* 159 ^^ m r\b 159 fc^S 906 JlVn^ 159 t^b 905 CD^«7t<|J^«| 548 -|-|n 9^4 "^SH 908 ^^ 114 nvn 907 ynfll 458 p|1*)J.{ 190 Dl^? 342 J-|»n^ 375 l^'^ni 190 CDtt^ 910 }^^;J2n 159 J<«7 909 Hi'^V* 914 i«:i"i 913 p:2t5^t 154 nin» 912 t^nsi 911 *a'b'm ^'^ I Diy«n 13 >7j7 917 D»7iy 916 nnDtr^i 915 nnn ^05 »v\; 901. 1J13;" s/zo// not/2c.ss OT;er zV. 13 it. Vide rule 39. ^2y' is the 3d pers. m. sing. fut. Kal of "i:3^» to pass over. 902. NDD the polluted. A noun masc. signifying en unclean or wipure person. From NOD to pollute. 903. lohfor those. S the same as Sx to^for^ &c. Rule 175. ID then^ thoscj a pronominal suffix. Rule 40. 904. "jSn walking, "jlT "jbri /ze ^Aa^ ivalketh the nvay. It is the par- ticiple Ben. Kal. Vide rule 78. num. 375. 905. D'b'INI though fools. 1 though. 1 is conjunctive, and, also, like- wise, thus; adversitive, but, now, though; causal, where/ore, therefore, since; disjunctive, or, either; negative, neither, 7ior; when it follows j'N xS, Sec. and, in some instances, of time, now, then, when. D'S'IN is the plur. of ViN* stupid, foolish, from Six grossness of body or mind. 906. VJT? shall not err. It is the 3d pers. m. plur. fut. Kal of n;T to err. PI is dropped before the servile 1 by rule 102. 907. {""^31 and the ravenous of, 1 and. j^lB a robber, art assailant, from "pa to break through. " The tyrant of beasts." Lowth. 908. Sd not. Fi'om n'?:: to wear away. So |'X 7zo?, from \\'ii vanity; and X*? 7iot, from nx7 to bring to nought. 909. niS;'' shall ascend upon it. T\l it, pron. suff. fern. Rule 39. S;*" for rh'j\ Rule 102. It is the 3d pers. m. sing. fut. Kal of n*?;' to as- cend. ' 139 the way of holiness; the unclean shall not pass over it; but it shall be for those: the wayfaring men, though fools, shall not err therein. 9 No lion shall be there, nor amj ravenous beast shall go up there- on, it shall not be found there: but the redeemed shall walk there. 10 And the i-ansomed of the Lord shall return and come to Zion 910. Xifon shall be found. It is the 3d pers. fern. sing. fut. Kal of H^l^tojind. Perhaps rTTl understood is the noun with whichit agrees; yet the agreement in gender is not universal. Vide the note to num. 1 14, Mr. Caddick observes that " When two substantives are in regimen, the adjective belonging to the one sometimes agrees with the other." This seems here to take place with respect to the verb. 911. D"'7lNJl the redeemed. It is the participle Paoul masc. plur. of the verb hni to redeem. It is used as a noun. Rule 71, n. and 159. 912. "1131 and the ransomed of. ^ and. ''M13 is in regimine forn"'M"!3 which is the plural masc. part. Paoul of m£3 to rescue from evil. The sing, is 'na instead of nns. Vide rule 103. 913. paiy"' shall return. \ paragogic. UIV' is the 3d pers. masc. plur. fut. Kal of aty to return. 914. 1X31 and shall come. 1 convers. Num. 19. n. 1N3 is the 3d pers, masc. plur. pret. Kal ofxj to come^ ov go. 915. nJ13 ivith exultation. 2 tvith. nJT a noun fem. a sho^ititig, from p to lea/ifor joy. 916. nnoiyi and with the joy of. ) and. r\nDty in regimine, from nnotyyoj/, a noun fem. from notJ' to rejoice. The joy of eternity is well rendered by Dr. \uO\i\h.) per petual gladness. 917. 0*71^^ eternity. A noun from aS>' to conceal. Eternity whether pastor future is hidden from man. Vide num. 354, 140 923 :nmi*i ^22 |^;i» 921 ^oii 920 -^ji^jj;* 9 19 nnntj^i ^^s ptria^ 918. \W\:! joy. A noun from lyiy to be cheerful. 919. nriDiyi and gladness, 1 a?zc?. nnoi^ is a noun fem. from no^ to rejoice. 920. U'ty Mey shall obtain. It is the 3d pcrs. plur. masc. fut. Hipli. of JtyJ to attain to. Being a verb in Pc Nun, it dx'ops its first radical in the future. Vide rules 94, 95. 141 with songs, and everlasting joy upon their heads: they shall obtain joy and gladness, and sorrow and sighing shall flee away. 921. 1331 and shall Jiee away. 1 convers. 1DJ is the third pars. plur. masc. pret. of Kal of 03 tojlee away. Though a verb in Pe Nun, it i? here regular. Vide rule 86. 922. |U' sorrow. A noun from 7\y to grieve. 923. nniXI and sighing. ^ and. nn3X sighing, a noun fem. from HJN. '0 groan. 142 A Table of similar Words ^ 'which the learner may enlarge at his pleasure. n3X he was willing. n3X the fioint of a sword. iTm to crop. mx a way. m3 he ate. rr\2 he fled. IT oppressed. pT beaten small. non these. non the sun. nn echo. 1T\ one. \"l alas. Tl he lived. ■]n strike thou. pn a statute. on them. nn hot. Dan tribute, n and dd. Bon violence. p behold. {n grace. in a mountain. in a Ao/e. no Aere. nD power. OD ?o number, 'i^p stubble. "O a lamb. np coW. 3D ^0 surround. 2W to return. ID ^0 depart^ IB? a prince. na «!Ae mouth. ns a snare. nsi ^0 accept. ■jty a hedge. LEST the transition from the use of the preceding helps to the sole aid of the lexicon and grammar should be thought too sudden, I have determined to furnish the learner with the roots of the words of a few chapters; in passing through which he will have need only to recur to his grammar, for all the help which will be desirable. The book of Job has been selected, because by far the hardest part of the Hebrew scriptures; consequently when the following nineteen chapters have been parsed, the learner will find little difficulty in reading, with the help of a translation, any of the other books; but he is ad- vised chiefly to read for some time the historical parts, as they will be most easily understood. 144 JOB I. on j^inn ti^^nn ri»m iDt:^ nvK viJ^ vn«n n'>r\ t:^»5t i Vdd Sn:i «inn t:^*«n »nn n«D ni") ninyi niiinje 1DV t:^'« n»i nnj^» itrvi m '\::hr^^ ^a^^p ♦n 4 1. iZ-'^X 7Hara, according to some, a root, with others from l^Hjircy but most probably from W reality, subsistence, to be. nTI to exist. 3 in, from (13 /lolloiv. y^N earth, from ■}") /o ruw, fo break. ]')}! Uz^ Vide Gen. x. 23, perhaps from Hi'^ ?o make firm, to devise. DVN Job, the persecuted one, irom yii to persecute, an enemy. Diy to put, constitute, hence a na}7ie. 1 Azs, for in or Xin he. Dn to finish, hence perfect. Here perfect in parts, not in degree. Vide c. ix. 20, 30, 31.* it!''' to direct, hence up- right. XT' to fear, to reverence. D'hSn God, perhaps from n'7X Arab. to reverence. ID to decline, to depart. J^T to be evil, evil. 2. 'i'r to beget, to bear. n>*2K' seven, from J/'DIV to satisfy, also seven. p a sow, from n33 /o build, hence n^ for nJ3 a daughter, plur. mJ3. * For Job to haA'e written this, would have been greater self-com- mendation, than that for which lie was reproved; it is improbable that he was the author, and impossible that he should record his own death. The style is not that of the pentateuch; every argument, therefore, which proves Moses to have written those five books, Avill equally prove that he did not write this. Chap, xxxii. 15, 16. point us to Elihvi as the writer, this is confirmed by his age, knowledge, presence as a spectator, and the coincidence of his sentiments with the divine decision. 145 JOB I. 1 THERE was a man in the land of Uz, whose name was Job; and that man was perfect and upright, and one that feared God, and es- chewed evil, 2 And there were born unto him seven sons and three daup^hters. 3 His substance also was seven thousand sheep, and three thousand camels, and five hundred yoke of oxen, and five hundred she-asses and a very great household; so that this man was the greatest of all the men of the east. 4 And his sons went and feasted in their houses, every one his day; and sent and called for their three sisters, to eat and to drink with them. ■ -* ■ - 3, nJpD fiossession, acquisition, cattle, from njp to /lossess. "^vS plur. CsSk a firincipal, a thouaand. |>« small cattle, shee/i.* bDl a camel; as a verb, to return, or to requite. WOTS to array. Jive. nXD plur. niND an hundred. HDV to coufile, a fiair, or yoke. "1p3 a beeve, collectively, a herd of bulls or cows; as a verb, to look, pnx plur. niJir\vS* a she-ass, from {HK strong. n"r3;^ the servants of the household, a female servant, from '^'2y to serve, a servant. 31 and fem. ryy> many, from HDT to mid' tifily. ^N0 strength, very great, very. ^"W to increase, to become great. V^ all, from n'?3 to finish. Dip to be before, also antiquity, the east. 4. iSn to go. T\W}? to 7nake. nni^D a feast, from r\rw to drink, n'3 a house, perhaps from n3 a hollow vessel, and both from 713 hollow, or rather 33 the same. DV day, supposed to be from C or DH, or from nnn to agitate. 'nh'Ct to send. Kip to call, nnx and mnx a sister, plur. Ti^TMi sisters, from nriN to connect. hDH to eat. TMMff to drink. Dy with. cn and nnn them, they, as a verb, to agitate. * In this account of Job's wealth we find no mention of money. In Abraham's day, metals, when given as a price, were taken by weight. Ch. xlii. 11, has therefore been alleged as an argument against the antiquity of this book; but HD'tJ'p is rendered " a piece of money," without authority. That word occurs beside only in Gen. xxxiij. 1?, T 146 avK "iD}^ o c'^D iDDD mh'y nSym npnn Dot^'m r^m^ HDD Danbn D^n*?.^ i^nai ^n i«Dn ♦Si^ 5. '^P'' or ^p3 ?o revolve. DV rfct/. nn'S'!] see ver. 4. nbiy ^o sent/. tJ'lp to sanctify. DDW to be diligent^ to rise early. 1p3 to search, the morning. tH^ to ascend, a burnt-offering, plur. V^S^. *lJ3Da a number, from 13D to enumerate. Sd a//, from n'vD to finish. O because, for, surely, from nno ^0 restrain. *1DN ?o s/ieafc, to say. ^h)ii /lerhafis, from Six ignorance, grossness. NLDn ^o tmz'ss, ^o deviate, to sin. p see ver. 2. "jlj ?o fi/fs*. This word is used as a valediction, 2 Sam. xix. 39. So it may be here, " and have taken leave oj" God in their heart." This sense of a renunciation, rather than a curse, should perhaps be given in ver. 1 1, in ch. ii. 5. 9, and in 1 Kin. xxi. 10 — 13, which are the only places in and Joshua xxiv, 32, in which places the Chaldee Targ. Septuag. and Vulgate render it a you?ig sheep, or la7nb. That this book was written near the days of the patriarchs, we in- fer from the length of the life of Job; his being the priest of his fa- mily; from the style and manner of writing; the mention of the de- luge, and the destruction of Sodom; and from its silence with respect to Israel, the destruction of the Egyptians, and the law given at Sinai; and that therefore it is a precious relic of the true religion as anciently ]K)ssessed by the nations. If these ideas be correct, this is the oldest book in the world. Confucius was probably contemporary with Cy- rus; Homer and Hesiod with Elijah; Sanchoniathon with Gideon; but this was before Moses, who must have delivered it to the Israel- ites; since the Jews have always acknowledged its authority, know no later reception of it, and would probably have received a Gentile book from no other hand. 147 5 And it was so, when the days of thdr feasting were gone about, that Job sent and sanctified them, and rose up early in the morning, and offered burnt-ofTerings cccorf/Zn^- to the number of them aU: for Job said, It may be that my sons have sinned, and cursed God in their hearts. Thus did Job continually. 6 Now there was a day when the sons of God came to present themselves before the Lord, and Satan came also among them. 7 And the Lord said unto Satan, Whence comest thou? Then Sa- tan answered the Lord, and said. From going to and fro in the earth. 8 And the Lord said unto Satan, Hast thou considered my servant Job, that there is none like him in the earth, a perfect a.nd an upright man, one that feareth God, and escheweth evil? which it has been taken in an evil sense. DTiSx ver. 1. 33S to mo-veufi and down, the heart. iS is the same. nD3 in this manner, from 3 in, and T\2 thus, from nnn to restrain. 7W}} to do, to observe. DV day. 6. N3 to come, or go. yi" to stand, ov/dace. niiT' Jehovah. Vide ante Gen. ii. 5. num. 154. DJ also. \D\2f to oppose, an adversary, Satan. "yVi the midst, from "jn to 6e within. 7. yit( i?JJ fo touch. DX //", a mother, a city. xS no, no?, from nxS to fail, h'^i upon, from n^ (To ascend. D'^a plur. the face, from nJD ^"0 ^mj-tz. p2 ro d/e**, /o renounce, sec ver. 5. 12. ]DK? ^0 oppose. S^ a//, from hSd to finish. 'V the hand, from m" ^0 cast forth, pi oTz/y, t/cf, except, vain, and in Hiph. ?o empty. ''Sx and Sx ?o, ww/o, from Sx io interpose. Sx is a particle of prohibition, or negation, not, no. xhfD to cast forth. XX"' to go forth. D;?D fro7n before, from with, ofrom, and D>* wz7/t, before. 13. Sdx fo enf. nn'ii' to drink, j'l 7t7«ej from nr to press. r>'3 a house, ll'om n2 a large measure called r daM, or from n32 ?o fiz^'/rf, see in 14S» -9 Then Satan answered the Lord, and said, Doth Job fear God for nought? 10 Hast not thou made an hedge about him, and about his house, and abotit all that he hath on every side? thou hast blessed the work of his hands, and his substance is increased in the land. 1 1 But put forth thine hand now, and touch all that he hath, and he will curse thee to thy face. 12 And the Lord said unto Satan, Behold, all that he hath is in thy power, only upon himself put not forth thine hand. So Satan went forth from the presence of the Lord. 13 And there was a day, when his sons and his daughters laere eating and drinking wine in their eldest brother's house: 14 And there came a messenger unto Job, and said, The oxen were ploughing, and the asses feeding beside them: 15 And the Sabeans fell u/ion them, and took them away; yea, they have slain the servants with the edge of the sword, and I only am escaped alone to tell thee. J 1 6 While he ivas yet speaking, there came also another, and said, ver. 4. nx in reg. 'nx a brother, from nnN to connect. niD3 Jirst borriy from 103 to firecede. 14. "^ihx^ a messenger, from '^nS Arab, to send. K3 to come, ov go. 1p3 a herd, to look. tJ'in to /dough. pnN a she-ass, plur. nJHN and nunx from |nN strong, nj^l to feed. DH'T' V «? their hands, that is, near them. 15. Si33 to fall ufion. WK? Sheba, perhaps the descendants of Seba the son of Cush. Vide Gen. x. 7. See also Gen. x. 28, and xxv. 3. Perhaps from l^tJ old, to return. X\dl to take. 1>*3 a youth, to move brisk- ly. n33 to strike, or smite. 713 in regim. 'S a mouth. y^X^ a sword, to de- stroy. wSd to escafie. p'^ only, vide ver. 12. ''3N /, from nJX to occur, to be/iresent. ""naS only I. '\2h afiart, from 13 alone. njJ in Hiph. to de- clare. 16. '])y yet, still, from "^y yet, futurity, to testify, n? and )] and fern, ns) this, this one. 131 to s/ieak. CN/re. Ss3 to fall. |D and "mfrom, 150 »J^f pi r^toh^H^ oS^Km D^^^viii i«^i nytjm -iD^n ^n nn -iniD nr nj^ n*? I'unb nnS ^" CD^'^DJin *7j7 iDC'Dn D'ti^^?'^ ntr'^tr ii^tr ontrD p-i noSDNi nnn 'sS i^n onvin n«i Dinpn j>in nn nnno nr ny n'^ "I'^nb n:i^ ok is noa V' o'riK^i d^*7:dk i^nijm i^n noKn '^2VD nxn nSnj nn riim niDin tDn^ni^ i^ ^j? Ssn n'^n n\:Q vt\^2 vy^ ^2i-:in itt^Nn n« 1:1^ iSyD n« npn nv^^ cpn nS 20 ot:^ 'n» npS ninn ]m nin» notr nit^^K D^ivi ]r): kSi nv« «on tn*7N'7 nSsn from nJO ^0 distribute. WD'iif the hea-uensf from U^ to Jilace. l;^3 ^o burn, JKX sheefi, small cattle, "y^l a youth^ to move quickly. ^3N to consume. IoSd to escape. Vide ver. 15. 17. See ver. 16. DnifD Chaldeans. Vide ante Gen. xv. 7. num. 399, n. A people in Abraham's days. DB? to filace. tySty three. D'lfxn companies.) troops, from l^NT ?Ae /^earf. taC'iJ to invade. SdJ vide v. 3. npS ?o ^cA-e. *i;?J vide v. 16. HDJ ?o s7nite. The other words see in ver. 15. 18. See all the words of this verse in ver, 17 and 13, ante. 19. run behold! as a verb in Hiph. to be present, nn the ivindy from m to inhale. Si J, SnJ masc. and n'^nj great ^ from SnJ ^o magnify y to be great. W ?o co/z/e, or go. l3;rD/rom beyond, v^from, and n:jj; beyond; as a verb, to pass. 131D a wilderness, ov place driven over, from "^^T ^0 rfnVe, /o s/zea^. ;rjj jro smite. J^DIN /ouj', from ;?ai four, to agitate. nJ3 a corner, to turn. n''3 a house, see A-ei'. 1 3 and 4. SSJ ^o/a//. TJ?J a youth, to be nimble. HD to die. 151 The fire of God is fallen from heaven, and hath burnt up the sheep, and the servants, and consumed them, and I only am escaped alone to tell thee. 17 While he nuas yet speaking, there came also another, and said. The Chaldeans made out three bands, and fell upon the camels, and have carried them away, yea, and slain the servants with the edge of the sword, and I only am escaped alone to tell thee. 18 While he was yet speaking, there came also another, and said, Thy sons and thy daughters were eating and drinking wine in their eldest brother's house: 19 And behold, there came a great wind from the wilderness, and smote the four corners of the house, and it fell upon the young men, and they are dead, and I only am escaped alone to tell thee. 20 Then Job arose, and rent his mantle, and shaved his head, and fell down upon the ground, and worshipped, 2 1 And he said, Naked came I out of my mother's womb, and na- ked shall I return thither: the Lord gave, and the Lord hath taken away; blessed be the name of the Lord. 22 In all this Job sinned not, nor charged God foolishly. 20. Dp to arise. y\T) to rend, bia and S'^^D a coverings from riS>' to ascend. 1U to shave^ from U to mow, or shear. Ssj to/all. px the earth, see ver. I. ni? to bow, hence nnty to bend very much. This verb uses "I sometimes instead of the last radical (vide rule 1 1 1) and especially in Hithp. 21. D'V naked. HT to come. JUJ the belly. DN a mother. 3iy to return. U'Xf,tin\!f thither, to place. Job probably pointed to his mother earth when he used this word. {n3 to give. npS to take, n'n to be. U\^ a name, (o place. ■^"ID to bless.* 22. hj all, from Vi^D tojinish. HT masc. nw fern. IT masc. or fern. this. Xnn to sin. |nJ to give. T\hDi) folly, from Ssn insipid. * We have here a beautiful example of piety and patient resigna- tion. W^hy the righteous should suffer affliction, whilst the wicked prosper, was a question dark and difficult to the gentile world. To cut this knot was the design of these sufferings, the following con- versation, and of its being perpetuated in this valuable relic of the ftn- 'ient gentile religion. 152 JOB II. :na I'jnnnDi vn«a loro ")D«»i nin» n» >in» '^\^'^ on tr»« 'pxi inoD v« *3 ^^'^ j<*7 Di* ints^a S«i iDify Sfc< yai in* t<3 nSa^ lin iDtrn ^« mn» nD«n n^"^^* T^^ ^« ^ *iD n«D pt2^n N^fn HDK^ WM DK 1« "jlO ^ 1. rrri to be. UV a day. X3 to come, p a son, from nj3 ?o AwV(/. 3^' to place. OJ a/so. jOty ^o ofifiose. "jin y nsy ip^rn iSyD t^^t^ lynpn iDnn oSip is the third person singular masculine future Kal of HDJ (o smite. It is doubly defective, vide rule 107. yniif an ijiflammation, or boilf from iVWO Chald. to be hot. j;i evil, distressing, to be disordered. f|D the hoi' low of the foot, or hand, from nSD to bend, h^y the foot, as a verb, to stamfi. n;r unto, npnp ;Ac top. or crown of the head, perhaps from np !;o bow. 8. npS fo ?aA-e. tyin flatter^ s-ware, a potsherd, a mechanic, as a verb ?o plough, engrave, devise. T\l to scrape. DtJ' to sit down, "jin the midst, from "jn to be in the midst. 12^ dust, or ashes, from 13 io 6rea/t or dissolve. 9. ION ^0 speak. r\i^H a woman, and tS'-X c man, from ty /*, realitij. pin io retain, non integrity, from DH /o perfect, "ji:) (To renounce, to take leave of, to bless. HD ^o '"i a friend, from n>n to feed. n;?"( evil, from ^'^ to break. «3 to come, "h}^ and h^ zipon, from nV to ascend. ClpO a place, from Dp to stand. TS'Sx Eliphaz, perliaps from '7X God, and T3 to be strengthened. "'JOTI the Temanite, or of Teman, from [D'H Teinan, the south, from jO'' the south, or right hand, mb:) Bildad, from, nS3 to wear away, or gro%u old, and in love. 'HV^y the Shuhite, or qf Shiiah, perhaps from r\T\W a pit, from na' to incline. 1ij1}f Zophar, from "li3:f to move quickhj. 'HO;': the Miamathite, or of A'aamath, perhaps from D}^Uo be pleasa7it. i;." to appoint, nn"" to unite. "Mto condole. DHJ to comfort. 12. Nc?3 to lift up. y^ the eye, plur. DT;?, from HJ;; to act upon, to reflect, pim distant, a distance, from pm to renmve- to a distance. 103 156 o tN'i o nnn vhii nan v^^ ^"i^*^ nvat^i nxD axDH bn:i ^0 knono. Sip a voice^ from nSp fo 5e /z,f A^, or swift. 7133 ^o iveefi. i'lp (To renrf. '7;^D and S'';;d a» outside garment^ from nS>' ?o C07ne ufi. p")l ifo scatter. 13}? dust. t^NT the head. D'DB' heavens^ from Dt^ t'ojmt. 13. SIS'' «o sjY. ;^3iy, 7ij?3i:' seven, in regim. X\'^1V from ;^3tJ' ^o have 4 157 seven nights, and none spake a word unto him: for they saw that fHs grief was very great. enough. DV day. nS'S and S'S the night, px no^, from JN to labour. "OT to afieak.* nx*l to see. h'M to be great. 2^3 griefy to grieve. nXD much^ strength. * If "13T signify to sfieak roughly or reprehend., as 1DN imports /• ''jieak mildly., perfect silence may not have been intended. 158 JOB III. j^DV nj< "-jbpn iri'D nj^ art* nns p nn« ^ n'j^m u -iVix DV fiK* nD«n iv« \^?^^ 2, 3 Vt« "i6!^n 'n* ^)r\n Dvn nn:) nin nD« * :n-)m vby vein S«i Syao n1S^? inirn-r innvn» n^iv vbv pirn niDb^i "]t:^n in'?^:!* ^ ^« '7£3}* innp» t^inn nVSn :dv hhdd ^ nin :t^n» St* D'n"^^ nsDon nit:^ ^oa nn» ^ :»:^yD boy nnon »ron 'rhi "i:id nS 'ij nntj^ 10 1. "inx aiid '"inx after, p //ic^ fi'»2<^, from p to make ready, nns to 'jjien. T\2 the mouth., in regim. '3. bSp f« vilify. 2. n3>' ?o ansiver. "IDX ?o s/ieak, or .fay. 3. n^K ro fieTzsh. nV /o bcffet, or bring foi'th, and in Huph. ;o 5e corn. nVb and S'S //if night, mn /o conceive. "13J a maw, as a verb, ?o be strong. 4. "^KTI darkness, to be dark. K/IT ?o seek, or regard. S^^DD and S;?D /ro;K above. V above, from nSj^ /o ascend. yD' to eiiiighten. mnj /z^/^r, from "inJ to flow, to shine.* * The sublimity of figures, and poetic fancy are probably all that designate this book to be poetry. This was the eastern manner and necessarily takes place, when language is not copious, and eloquence unimproved. Not only religion, but lav/s and history were in ancient times committed to poetry. Considering the age, country, occasion, characters, and other circumstances of this conversation, the language must have been highly figurative; which, though somewhat defective of perspicuity in modern times, is hevertheless vastly more impres- sive. 159 JOB III. 1 AFTER this opened Job his mouth, and cursed his day. 2 And Job spake, and said, 3 Let the day perish wherein I was born, and the night in which it was said, There is a man-child conceived. 4 Let that day be darkness; let not God regard it from above, nei- ther let the light shine upon it. 5 Let darkness and the shadow of death stain it; let a cloud dwell upon it; let the blackness of the day terrify it. 6 As for that night, let darkness seize upon it: let it not 15e joined unto the days of the year; let it not come into the number of the months. 7 Lo, let that night be solitary; let no joyful voice come therein. 8 Let them curse it that curse the day, who are ready to raise up their mourning. 9 Let the stars of the twilight thereof be dark, let it look for light, but ha-ve none, neither let it see the dawning of the day: 5. Sw to redeem^ to fiollute as tvith blood. nioSv from Sv a shadow^ and niD death, ptf to dwell. ]i;r to cloud over. n^2 to terrify. ''TiDJ in regim. "VlOJ thick darkness, from 10D to convolve. 6. npS to take. "12D to number. T]y the moon. 7. HIdSjI solitary, or a rock, from D^J to roll together, or from ^7^ a round mass, and no;? to stand firm, pi to sing. 8. HDD to curse. 11X to curse: nn;r to firefiare. "Ti}? or n*1J? to em/itu out, or "n;^ to collect together. frTlS from m'? to Join; or from "l"? cou- pled, and jn a serpent. Leviathan. 9. yon to darken. 30:3 to shine. ']Wi to blow, mp to wait. '£i;,*3;r plur. in reg. the eye-lids, vibratory beams, from "^S;? to repeat a motion. The root is ^ to fly, ot flutter. inU' the dawn, to be dusky. 10. "^JD io close. hSt to 9hut. THD to hide. Sd;? to labour. 160 :vu«i ♦n^if* IDID rT^o« tDn^D nj*? nDb ^ »yu» "im:* DK^i m iSin D^yii^n Dt:^ nie* ^^ :tr:ij Sip ivdk^ f^'? i^js^t:^ dh^dj^ nn» jhd is :viixD '^Qn layi r'n reason, from J^n" /o A-now. mp fo firevent. p3 ^o d/es*, or ^enrf Me knee, ma' /o /iour. pr to suck. 13. aDB' /o He down. Dplff to rest. |tJ?' to sleep, m ?o rest. 14. I'^f"' it) constilt. nJ!] /o build, -in ?o /oy waste. 15. Ijy io rfjreci. in? bright. nSd ?o///. f)D3 /o cftfsire. 16. Si33 to fait, pa ?o /«c?e. SS;; to C07ne ufi. 17. ^^B'l to be wicked. Sin ?o rest. ?J*) ^o tremble. W to rest. j?i'' ;<> labour. T\2 strength. 18. "ION ro bind. jNty ?o 5e tranquil, lyjj ?o exact. 19. B'Sn ^"0 emanciiiate. pxc ruler. 20. |nj ?o ^iVe'. Sd;^ (fo labour, n^n io //ve. *1D ?o de ^zVier. 161 10 Because it shut not up the doors of ray mother's womb, nor hid sorrow from mine eyes. 1 1 Why died I not from the womb? why did I not give up the ghost when I came out of the belly? 12 Why did the knees prevent me? or why the breasts that I should suck? 1 3 For now should I have lien still and been quiet, I should have slept; then had I been at rest; 14 With kings and counsellors of the earth, which built desolate places for themselves: 15 Or with princes that had gold, who filled their houses with silver: 16 Or as an hidden untimely birth I had not been: as infants ivhich never saw light. 17 There the wicked cease yrom troubling; and there the weary be at rest. 18 There the prisoners rest together; they hear not the voice of the oppressor. 19 The small and great are there; and the servant is free from his master. 20 Wherefore is light given to him that is in misery, and life unto the bitter in soul. 21 Which long for death, but it cometh not, and dig for it more than for hid treasures? 22 Which rejoice exceedingly, and are glad when they can find the grave? 23 Why is light given to a man whose way is hid, and whom God hath hedged in? 24 For my sighing cometh before I eat, and my roarings are pour- ed out like the waters. 21. riDn to wait for. nDH to dig. {DDD a treasure^ from \00 to hide. 22. nOB' to rejoice. Sj to bound with joy. Wlff to be cheerful. NVD to find. 13p to bury. 23. "^IT to tread. "WQ to conceal, p ^o hide. 24. onS to eat. n3X to sigh. yM to fiour forth. i^V to roar. X 162 Ins o vmm D»DD i:)n^"i i^nn »nm« »an^ 25 :m unn »nm ^Si 'nDptr ^^^i 25. in3 to fear. nriN to apjiroach. "M to fear.* X3 ^o come. * This anxiety which attended Job in his first prosperity, was pro- bably lest his children should fall into sin. Vide c. i. 5. viii. 4. iv. 8 — 11. He might also have been apprehensive of the incursions of the Sabeans and Chaldeans. The Chaldee paraphrast reads verse 26 interrogatively; Was I not in safety, See. when it was told me of my successive losses? but trouble came upon me when I heard of the death of my children. The author of The Divine Legation of Moses demonstrated, con- trasting this passage with ch. xxix. 18, and xxx. 26, observes,, " These things are entirely discordant, if understood of one and the ^ame person." To which Mr. Peters answers; " Perhaps not, for 163 25 For the thing which I greatly feared is come upon me, and that which I was afraid of, is come unto me. 26 I was not in safety, neither had I rest, neither was I quiet: yet trouble came. 26. rhw to be quiet. t2T>\if to be at rest. Wl to rest. IJ"1 to tremble. though I might insist upon it as a thing very pardonable, and not at all unnatural, for a person under an excessive load of grief to forget himself a little, and to talk inconsistently, especially at the distance of so many chapters; yet I shall waive this plea, because I think there is an easy way of reconciling these passages. If we suppose, for in- stance, that the fear and disquiet expressed in the first of them was a fear for his children; and the hope and confidence expressed in the two latter, were such as flowed from a conscience of his own integri'- ty, and sincere endeavour to discharge his duty," 164 JOB lY. yb^ 121 HDin HDKn ^in^nn t5»b« tvn i> 2 dn n"iD» nin :Sdv »d vh^Dn n^n nj^^^n ^ Donni i'Sd pD9» '-^tr^o jprnn nisn onn * tDm impn inboD inj^n* s^'yn :Snam "ini^ ^ t=)nti^» ns^Ki nnfc< v^ Nin ♦» kj nor nonn "^ ^D37 ♦nn px ♦ti^"in *n»x"i ntr«D :nnDJ s :ibD' ^S}^ ^^T\^^ na^«* niSi< nwi^ i^m'iip' 9 jiyni Dn'£)D ^itri Hnt:^ ^ipi nn« n:jKt:^ '^ 1 . 713;? to answer. Vide, for the names, chap. ii. v. 11.* 2. nD3 to attempt. nxS to take it ill. liT to withhold. h^O to sfieak^ h3^ to be able. 3. ID' to discijiline . HD"! to relax. pTH to strengthen. 4. Sb?3 ?o/a^^. Dp to rise. p2 /o bend the knee. ^^2 to bend. J'DK tn strengthen. 5. rxah to faint. >'JJ ?o ^owcA. SnD ito 6e m a hurry. * Whether Job's extraordinary sufferings were not the punish- ment, and proof of extraordinary, but concealed guilt, was the point in dispute. Though the principle adopted by the three friends was erroneous, yet when they speak of divine justice and human guilt, they are correct. Job's denial of the charge of hypocrisy was right, but he went too far in pleading for his innocency. All of them, except EUhu, became too warm in the dispute; but all of them agree in the great principles of the true religion; the existence, nature, glori- ous perfections, and sovereignty of God; the creation of the world, the fall of man, &:c. The errors and defects here exhibited are no more given for our imitation, than those of Moses, David, or Jonah were; but it was proper the conduct and characters of the speakers should be given truly, and consequently with their imperfections. 165 JOB IV. i THEN" Eliphaz the Temanite answered and said, 2 If we assay to commune with thee, wilt thou be grieved? but who can withhold himself from speaking? 3 Behold, thou hast instructed many, and thou hast strengthened the weak hands. 4 Thy words have upholden him that was falling, and thou hast strengthened the feeble knees. 5 But now it is come upon thee, and thou faintest; it toucheth thee, and thou art troubled. 6 Is not t/iis thy fear, thy confidence, thy hope, and the uprightness of thy ways? 7 Remember, I pray thee, who ever perished, being innocent? or where were the righteous cut off? 8 Even as I have seen, they that plough iniquity, and sow wicked- ness, reap the same. 9 By the blast of God they perish, and by the breath of his nostrils are they consumed. 10 The roaring of the lion, and the voice of the fierce lion, and the teeth of the young lions are broken. 6. NT to fear. SdD confidence, insensibility, mp to expect earnestly. on to fierfect.\ 7. np3 to be fiure. ns^N from 'N when, and n3 here. "^Vf to bejti^t. nn3 in Niph. to be cutoff. 8. T\»r\ to see. B'ln to plough. ;?*)? to soiv. y^^ to reafi. 9. DK'J to breathe. n3N to perish. nSj to consume.. 10. ym to roar. niN to pluck off. ^^a a black lion. n:B' to renew. "133 to cover, yph to break in pieces. In Niphal for i;?nSj. t The Vau has been thought misplaced, and that it should be un- derstood before thy hope; but by Jear, the object of fear, God, is meant; who is the confidence; and hope, as well as fear of every saint". 166 'ifi Sy PIP"! n^nsn ^niD^y uni mvni ^i^np '-^ noK ^^'^i 1DV» :ntt^:i nnvti^ nDon J^Sn» ^^ :yDt2^t< Sip» nD!DT ♦rs? iJiJ^ n:nQn in^nD nviS CD'^TD ''^nD inD» y-\vb -^p^D *m ^^sh 20 :nD:3n:i ^b^ iniD» on Dnn» yD:i ^Sn :nnK* 21 11. wh to knead Qrarnple). f|lD ^o raven. T^3 ?o separate. 12. 33i ^0 s/fa/. npS ;o take. JIX /Ae fcr, io lueigh. ^"0^ a iv/iis/ier} to mutter. 13. Cfl^'iy hurrying thoughts. '\\*\D in Arab, ^o hurry away. |Vin a vision, from nrn ?o see. Sdj to Jail. DTI in Niph. ?o fie overwhelmed in slee/i. lyiJN /«««, from 51'JX fo fie injirm. 14. nn3 to fear. VCO to befal. njTT ;o tremble. DX;^ ?o fie strong. 15. «]bn to fiass before. *1DD /o be rough. "^^^^S the hair., to stand uli- right. "^U/^ flesh, to spread. 16. TD;^' i'o stand. ^^D} to be a stranger. Hiph. to know. HNI to see. njion from nJD to distribute. IJJ before, to be manifest. HDT ro conform, to be silent. J.'r:iy /o hear. 17. tt'JN ^0 fie injirm. yvi to justify. TVif^ to make. "in£3 to be pure. "13J to be strong.\ t It has been rendered " An mortalis a Deo justificabitur?" and " Num mortalis a numine Justus erit?" " An quisquam vir a factore suo mundus habebitur?" " An a conditore suo purus erit vir?" In this soiiis« the ai'gument is well suited to the ideas of Eliphaz, In the 167 i I The old lion perisheth for lack of prey, and the stout lion's whelps are scattered abroad. 12 Now a thing was secretly brought to me, and mine ear received a little thereof. 13 In thoughts from the visions of the night, when deep sleep fall- eth on men, 14 Fear came upon me, and trembling, which mad€" all my bones to shake. 15 Then a spirit passed before my face; the hair of my flesh stood up: 1 6 It stood still, but I could not discern the form thereof: an image %oas before mine eyes; there was silence, and I heard a voice, saijingf 17. Shall mortal man be more just than God? shall a man be more pure than his Maker? 18 Behold, he put no trust in his servants; and his angels he charg- ed with folly. 19 How much less in them that dwell in houses of clay, whose foundation is in the dust, which are crushed before the moth? 20 They are destroyed from morning to evening; they perish for ever without any regarding it. 21 Doth not their excellency w/hcA is in them go away? they die even without wis-dom. 18. "yyj! to serve. pN in Hiph. to trust, yh in Arab, to send. Dti' to fiut. '7^n to be foolish. 19. pU' to inhabit. IDH to make turbid, 7nud. "^i^y dust, to throw dust. nO"" to lay a foundation. NDT to break down. " They crush them." t?i> a moth, a moth ivorin, 20. T\2 to pound, or wear to pieces, 'h'y without, from nSj to wear away. DB? to put. xyi'ti continually, from ni*i to be over, or beyond. 12X to perish. 21. i?DJ to go. in'' to excel. Does not their excellency pass away Z>2 with them? D3n to be wise. comparative sense adopted in our version, he must be supposed to intend that if man suffered without guilt, he would be more righteous and pure than God who sends affliction on him, Mhich also agrees with the argument. 168 JOB V. n f) D'tJ^npD »D "-^M n:n5? ts^^n f avn in»:::j» f]tfi>n oni *ibv SdvS d^k o iSdv ^ m«'7Di npn r«i mSnji ntry :»nnn D^trs 9 D^D n*?::^! r'^^« 03 "-^y '^D)D tn^n :"i£3dd yii iy 10 1 . n whether? tif is (here. TMJf to answer, ty^p to sanctify. CB^np is angels perhaps here, as in ch. xv. 15. Dan. viii. 13. nJS to behold^ look, or have resjiect. 2. S*1N stufiid^ from SiN grossness. y^T^ to kill. \sy2 in many of Dri Kennicott's cod. D;?3 anger , to be vexed, in Hiph. to irritate, nns m.- or fern, a fool, from nriD ^o entice, ma or riD ^o cf/e, in Hiph. to kill. nXJp envy, zeal, rather here indignation, from K3p ?o dur^z. The Lord destroys the wicked; or their evil destroys them. 3. riNI to see. biN grossness. E'lty to take root. 2pJ to curse, to pro- nounce accursed. HJ to rest. DXnS suddenly, from Nn£) sudden. 4. pm ?o 6e distant. yUf^ to save. X3T /o crwsA or ofifiress. *TJ?B' iDn mniK iDun :nn«^i i^ o :i-\5nM nny ixn nan o iK^n no'? 20,21 ♦on :"!«n^m nnn iK-^n t'«>n nny 22 10. n^' yet, time. Sec. DHJ /o comfort, iho to harden. xilY) to be weak, to grieve. Son to s/iare. nnD to hide. ION to sfieak. t5'^p to sanctify. \ \\. T\2 to be strong. Vn' to hope, n^p fo cut off. pX ^o firolong. 12. n33 to build. "Wl to spread. tSTlJ copper, to observe. 1 3. "it;? fo Ae//2. n'li'in ivisdom, permanency, reality, from Diy' reality. ma fo rfrzt;e away. 14. DD »S lion *n»:itt^ nn^ tt^nnK 25 D^'jD riDin'jn irD:DO n:i']n nov noi -ij!^» 26 iVfln Din* Sv t)« tti^«u nDi< mnSi ntrnn 27 Hyi o 1J5 ib^t^in nnyi la^iiin S37 nDni 28 n'^ij^ MD S« r<3 intj^ :ntD» d« dd^^b 29 :n'nn 10^ J^^ *^n 23. t3'7D ^0 deliver. "):! to break, op/iress. yyy to act with violence. mi) to redeem. 24. m' to direct, teach. W^Ti to be silent. HJiy to err. |3 to divide, distinguish, understand. 25. yiD to be strong. Its'"* to direct. riD' to point out, or firove. 26. D'Sd words, from So /o divide. 3iyn io ^/iitjj?:. TW^ spirit, from m ;o inhale, ^i;^'' to give over, in Niph. ^o despair. 27. DIjT on orphan, from DTC ro /acA:. Ss) to fall. m3 ^o rf/g". n;>'^ ro 179 23 Or, Deliver me from the enemies hand? or, Redeen;i me from the hand of the mighty? 24 Teach me and I will hold my tongue; and cause me to under- stand wherein I have erred. 25 How forcible are right words! but what doth your arguing re-? prove? 26 Do ye imagine to reprove words, and the speeches of one that is desperate, which are as wind. 27 Yea, ye overwhelm the fatherless, and ye dig a pit for your friend. 28 Now, therefore, be content; look upon me: for it is evident unto you if I lie. 29 Return, I pray you, let it not be iniquity; yea, return again, my righteousness is in it. 30 Is there iniquity in my tongue? cannot my taste discern perverse things? 28. Vk"* to will. nJS to behold. 313 to lie. 29. aa' in Kal to turn, or be changed. W, now, I beseech you, to fail. n'n to be. rh)^ iyiiquity, from Sly to ojifiress. r\hp to ascend, '^y yet. pn3f to justify. 30. TW" to be. \\]lh the tongue, perhaps from ^h to knead, ^n the pa- late, or roof of the mouth, mental tas(€. \2 to nnderfitand. mn affliction^ to subsist. 180 JOB yii. no-i na^n tri*? i^m nv CDnn:) ♦nvn^i^i 5 ™ i^K »iD ibp »D» ^DHy^ vy\ my nsv triJi'i ^ , I - - - ■ — ■» - . -- . . ■ — - . - _■■..- — _ ■- -- 1. WV a tvarfare. C'UX a ma?i, from iJ'JX /o 6e infirm. "^Dlff to hire. ?. n^;? ?o ser-ue. ^V.W to fiant. h'i the shade, to overshadow, nip ^o stretch towards. S>D to work, the work, wages. 0. bni to possess. riT /Ae moon, a month. Nljy vanity, to no fiurjiose. h"h night, bn;^ ^o ?oz7. nJD i;o number. 4. ^DC' ^0 /?> down. "IDN ^o sc;/. Dp /o rz6-c. ^^D to measure out, or prolong. T\'^ to mix, the evening. y2^ to satisfy, cloy. D'm3 tossings, from inJ ^o mox-e quickly. The root is nj to move. f^tJ'J ^o 6/ow, the morning or evening breeze, the twilight. 5. B^nS ^0 clothe, yii/2 to spread abroad, the Jlesh. PIDI to shoot out, a worm. W^^ adhesion, from ti'JJ to be close to. nsj; dust, ^^'^y the skin, from nn;? /ro uncover. ^1"^ to be stiff, ov parched. DNO to crack, or rAc^. 6. nbp ?o Ae swzy?. ""JD more than. nJD ro distribute. i'Mi to weave, a shuttle. nS:) to fail, or 6^ consuined. DjDS ^//e fwrf, /o cfffso to he. Hlpn expectation, from nip ^o ?enrf towards. 181 JOB VII. 1 IS there not an appointed time to man upon earth? are not his days also like the days of an hireling? 2 As a servant earnestly desireth the shadow, and as an hireling looketh for the reward of his work; 3 So am I made to possess months of vanity, and wearisome nights are appointed to me. A When I lie down, I say. When shall I arise, and the night be gone? and I am full of tossings to and fro unto the dawning of the day. 5 My flesh is clothed with worms and clods of dust: my skin is broken, and become loathsome. 6 My days are swifter than a weaver's shuttle, and are spent with- out hope. 7 O remember that my life is wind: mine eye shall no more see good. 8 The eye of him that hath seen me shall see me no 7}iore: thine eyes are upon me and I am not. 9 M the cloud is consumed and vanisheth away; so he that goeth down to the grave shall come up no viore. 10 He shall return no more to his house, neither shall his place know him any more. 7. 131 to remember, n'n to live. 2'2f to return. \y the eye, from my to rejlect. nxi to see. 8. ')W to behold. 0. vh to fail, or pHd to fail or consume a-vjay. \yj a cloud, from jj; to defiress. "fv to go. IT to descend. '?iNty the /ilacc of the dead, from Vxty to ask. nS;; to asceiid. 10. ati? to return. •\yi time, n'3 a house, PD a recefitacle. 13J t^know. aipD a standing; or /ilace, from Op to rise, or stand ufr. 182 »nn "^vi nniii* »D "ltyn« ^s*b ♦i^ to:i ^^ ♦3 t»in CD« *:it« en ^trsi ion nn»t:^K 12 :»n"iDvyD ma ^trs: pinD nnnni ♦:n5?nn 15 h^S riDD niinnn D^yjinS onpnS inpsm '8, 19 »n^'3 to terrify. 15. in2 to choose, or approve. pjHO strangliiig, from p3n ^o strangle., niDXJ^ dones, from D2f;^ ro 6e strong. Death rather than my skeleton or bones. 16. DSD to despise or abhor. dSj; rtme hidden, from dV ^o conceal. rrn ;o //-z'f. Snn /o cm^e-. San vanity, from San ro evapora^. 183 i 1 Therefore I will not refrain my mouth, 1 will speak in the an- guish of my spirit, I will complain in the bitterness of my soul. 12 Am I a sea, or a whale, that thou settest a watch over me? 13 When I say, My bed shall comfort me, my couch shall ease my complaint; 14 Then thou scarest me with dreams, and terrifiest me through visions: 1 5 So that my soul chooseth strangling, and death rather than my life. 16 I loath ity I would not live alway: let me alone, for my days are vanity. 17 What is man, that thou shouldest magnify him? and that thou shouldest set thine heart upon him? 18 And that thou shouldest visit him every morning, and try him every moment? 19 How long wilt thou not depart from me, nor let me alone till I swallow down my spittle? 20 I have sinned; what shall I do unto thee, O thou Preserver of men? why hast thou set me as a mark against thee, so that I am a burden to myself? 21 And why dost thou not pardon my transgression, and take away mine iniquity? for now shall I sleep in the dust, and thou shalt seek me in the morning, but I shall not be. 17. m^ to be infirm. SlJ in Kal and Hiph. to make great, na? to place. 3^? the hearty affections^ &c.* 18. np3 to visit. "Ip3 to look, the morning. ;U*l to be quiet, a rest, a moment. ]n2 to prove, 19. r\y]a so turn, or regard. nSI to remit, let go. >'b3 lo swallow, pi sfiittle, from pT to sjiit. 20. Nan to sin. hys to labour, ^^!ii to preserve. DIX man, from nm to form a likeness. 02/ to put. ^USn a mark, from ;^Ji3 to meet. n%T toj^c XiyD a burden, from N*^3 to bear, take. 21. ^m to lift up.p^D to transgress, a transgression. 13;r to pas^ by. "^y depravity, inigjiity, from TWJ to pervert. "^D^; dust. 2DVf to lie down. "inty to seek early in the morriing, or earnestly. * Vide Psalm viii. 4. c\)iv. 3. 184 JOB YIII. tyhn hhjcih ]ii iir nD«^^ ^nwn in^n \if'^ h^ CDt^i D95ro my^ ^«n n's '"^-^i* "J'^3 ni-i^ 3 1Dnb\i^^^ ^h ihdh Tn tD« :p-iv my> >ik^ ^ Ski "-^x ^s< 'inti^n nnt< Dt* :Dvfit^fi no 5 n'-y* nny o hdk nt^^^i ^r Dt^ jpnnn nsj^ s yi5 r^Si •>:imt« Sijsn o :Dm:i« ipnS p-^Dt 9 •nD«^ Tinv Dn >i'7n jvn^ '^^ i^'O' ^^ o ^^ 1. nj;? to answer. 10K ?o sjieak. Vide ch. ii. 11, for the other words. 2. SSo and ^D ^o speak. *T'33 multifilied^ 133 ^o multifily. Z.my to fiervert. Ifii^WO judgment^ fvom 03^ to judge. nK' Bounti- ful, from mis' to jiour forth, yvi justice, to justify. 4. XUn nDtt^ ^^ nu iD^D* vt^^nt:^ S:i Sy :t^r^\i; nStt* -ly ta^yio 21 :iii»t< DVtt^i Snxi ntrs wDh^ T«it£^ 22 12. 3X greennessy to swell, ^tap in nearly the same sense as 3£3p (o crofiy or CMf o^. 'Jsb is not only m the firesence of^ but before, in point of time. T^n grass, or rather herbage of a tubular kind. 1^3' ro cfrt/ w/^. ?o wither. 13. niniN c company, or "zycys, from TT^N fo 5-0 zn c track. nDB? to for- get, mpn Ao/ie, from nip ^0 rcnrf n7z;o. f]3n a profigate person, to fiot- lute. n3N fo fieris/i. 14. :3p ro /oaf/i, or be disgusted at. hOD hope, strength, or stupidity, a?'33i' a spider, perhaps from D3;? to fetter, and 8^33 ?o subdue. nD3D confidence, from nD3 ;o c/fn^- wn^o, or frMsr ztz. 15. \y^ to lean, no;? to stand. pTH fo ?aA'e a strong hold upon. Dp io stand, or remain. 16. 20"^ full of sap, tender, green, (0 be wet ov moist. Wr^tif the swi^ to minister, p and n3J a garden, from p ^0 protect. r\T>iy in reg;. c branch, from pr ?o «hc^. NX' ^0 go forth. 17. Sj a fountain, a heap, to roll. B''lty a roo^, to take root, or ^0 root up. po «o intivine. pK a s^orze, from n]3 to build, nin fo fasten the eyes upon. 187 12 Whilst it z's yet in his greenness, and not cut down, U withereth before any other herb. 13 So are the paths of all that forget God, and the hypocrite's hope shall perish: 1 4 Whose hope shall be cut off, and whose trust shall be a spider's web. 15 He shall lean upon his house, but it shall not stajid: he shall hold it fast, but it shall not endure. 16 He is green before the sun, and his branch shooteth forth in his garden. 17 His roots are wrapped about the heap, and he seeth the plac£ of stones. 18 If he destroy him from his place, then it shall deny him, sayings 1 have not seen thee. 19 Behold, this is the joy of his way, and out of the earth shall others grow. 20 Behold, God will not cast away a perfect man, neither will he help the evil doers: 21 Till he fill thy mouth with laughing, and thy lips with rejoicing: 22 They that hate thee shall be clothed with shame, and the dwell- ing-place of the wicked shall come to nought. 18. }h'^ to swalloit) uji^ to destroy. Dp to remain. KTID to fail, to fail in the truth, nsi to see. 19. W^ to be cheerfulj hence ViX^Sl^joy. ']^\'^ a ivay^ to go. IJ);? dust. *inN another, behind. ViO^i to sprout. 20. DND to despise. On perfect, tofnish. ptP to strengthen, to hold, fast. )!'\ to do evil, or be evil. 21. nSn to fill, pnty to laugh, nflty the Up, to crush, plur. DTISB' lips^ T\^T\T\ shouting, from ^"1 to break. 22. ^W to hate. \2j:h to clothe, ni^a shame, from ^1 to be confounded. bns a tent, to spread a tent. \W\ unjust, to he itnjust. \H to labour, hence px vanity, nothing. ^ 18H 10 JOB IX. nDi p o ♦DVT OiDK nQi '^ >;'7 iDv nn*7 v^n» dn :"-?« dj; ts^i^}^ pn^* 3 ♦JD HD v*»JT» to know. nan ?o overturn. *]N anger, the nose, from HSX ^o Aea?, or from f]3N To breathe, to be angry. 6. IJ1 ?o tremble. Dp ?o s?a«S'ip jDnnoD ♦jyat!^» o ♦nn jit^^n ♦:in» >iS mw »D DfjK^D^ D>'» to pervert, to prove per- verse. Jil. X'T to know. K'3J to respire. QXD to contemn, n'n to live. 22. j/'K'T to be unjust. H^D to consume. 23. Bity a scourge, from T\aiif to go to and fro. nr3 to die, in Hiph. to kill. DNnfl suddenly, from Nn£3 sudden. HDD in reg. nDD trial, from HDi to try. yi pure, from np3 to be clear. l}h to scorn, or deride. 24. \T\^togive. l2Q'iif to judge. HDD to cover. SfS. Sp to be swift. yi?9 run. ^02 tofrr. nx"^ if) .^ef. 192 ojte r:pjn kS o *n3?f» ♦nivy Sd *nn:i^ 28, 29 >inj )::v^ 'WD tv^ii tr to fear. 3!^;; ?o labour, to grieve. J^T* «o Arwow. HpJ ?o cleanse. 29. J?ty"l /o 6^ unjust. b^H vanity, to evafiorate. yy to labour. 30. ym ?o was/i. ih^ snow, pt |||r HDT) to cleanse, in Hiph. "j into y. 13 purity, or alkaline salt. Is. i. 25, from *13 ?o cleanse. ^D rAe ^o/- ^ow o/"^>&e /iarac?, from HsID ^o 6e«c?. 31. nniy corruption; to mar, or corrupt. ^730 ?o immerse. 3;rn /o abominate or loathe. TxdlVi an outer garment, from d"7K? to perfect. 193 25 Now my days are swifter than a post; they flee away, they see no pood. Hi 26 They are passed away as the swift ships; as the eagle that hast- eth to the prey. 27 If I say, I will forget my complaint, I will leave off my heavi- ness, and comfort 7nysclf; 28 1 am afraid of all my sorrows, I know that thou wilt not hold me innocent. 29 If Ihe. wicked, why then labour I in vain? 30 If I wash myself with snow-water, and make my hands never so clean; 31 Yet shalt thou plunge me in the ditch, and mine own clothes shall abhor me. 32 For he is not a man, as I cm, that I should answer him, and we should come together in judgment. 33 Neither is there any days-man betwixt us, that might lay his hand upon us both, 34 Let him take his rod away from me, and let not his fear terrify me; 35 Then would I speak, and not fear him: but it is not so with me. 32. T\iy to answer. N3 to come, nn"' to unite. U2\ff to judge. 33. nt^' to be, rVDn an umfiire, from nD' to demonstrate. ni7 to place. naiy to repeat. ' 34. ID to turn aside. D3t!'* a rod. HDX terror^ from D'K terrible, n;^3 to terrify. 35. 13T to sfieak. XT to fear. '"\^y in my standings with me, "ir^y to stand, and ■• me. * The 13 in this word is of the ordinary size in many of Dr. KeH" nicott's books. 2B 194 JOB X. ^Di nnm« 'n»t:^ 'bv naty« ^"nn ♦t^^fli r]^[>^ i yu» D«»n o ptryn o iS aiDn :»innn no 3 lb ntrn ♦i^yn tnvflin D^yts^n n*:ty Syi tsd^ -loy ^1^1 wtJ^y 'lOHD o K3 "^^t j^iySnni^ 1. tap ?o loathe, in Niph. ^o 6e disgusted at. Br33 ^o irea^Ae. H'H to live. 3Tj; ro /fflT^e. n'l? firq/biind meditation, care, from ntJ? «o dow. 13n /ro sfieak. 13 ^o 3c Z>f/^er. 2. ;'2;-> ro 6e unjust in Hiph. to pronounce unjust. VT to know, in Hiph- to show. 31 to strive. 3. r>w; to o/i/iress. DXr: to des/iise. ^r ^o fofiour. ^2 the hollow of the han'd,\vom n3D to bend, my! counsel, from \r to counsel. VV!^ to be unjust. ;?£)' to irradiate. 4. 17 /Ae e?/f , from n:;; ^o fl#cc^ 15:^3 /e«/i, to sliread. 7M^'^ to see, ij;"lJX man, from K/iX ro be infirm. 5. nr^J^ c xjear, to reiieat. 13^ a ?nan, to be strong. 6. typ3 /o «ee/t o/?er. pv iniquitxj, from m;? ro /ierx;er^ «0n ««, <» Twtfi* //;e viark. (i'-n /o inquire for. 195 JOB X. 1 MY soul is weary of my life: I will leave my complaint upon myself: I will speak in the bitterness of my soul. 2 I will say unto God, Do not condemn me; show me wherefore thou contendest with me. 3 Is it good unto thee that thou shouldest oppress, that thou should- est despise the work of thine hands, and shine upon the counsel of the wicked? 4 Hast thou eyes of flesh? or seest thou as man seeth? 5 Are thy days as the days of man? are thy years as man's days, 6 That thou inquirest after mine iniquity, and searchest after my sin? 7 Thou knowest that I am not wicked; and there is none that can deliver out of thine hand. 8 Thine hands have made me, and fashioned me together round about; yet thou dost destroy me. 9 Remember, I beseech thee, that thou hast made me as the clay; and wilt thou bring me into dust again? 10 Hast thou not poured me out as milk? and curdled me like cheese? 1 1 Thou hast clothed me with skin and flesh, and hast fenced me with bones and sinews. 7. j^T' to know. y\if'\ to be unjust. SvJ to deliver. a. aXJ' to form by labour, to afflict. TW]; to make. "WV to unite. 3'3D around, from 33D to turri about, from 30 to turn. }?^2 to swallow up.. 9. IDH day, to render turbid. 3K/ to return. 1D;t dust. 10. i'ln milk, oil,fat. "ysl in Hiph. to pour, to melt. nJ3J o cheese^ a hill, from 3J a protuberance. NDp in Kal to be condensed, in Hiph. to coagulate. 1 1. ni;; akin, from Hi;; to strip. yi'^Jlesh, to spread. w:h to clothe, Qi*;; a bone, to be strong. TX a nerve, or tendon, from IJ fo assault, "pvi to fence thoroughly, from "[W to check. 196 nitotr innpfii nov n^m nom tD^^n t^iDDti^n 12 vntj^ ^t!^«n NJii^« t^*? »npiifi 'h ♦b'7N 'nytfi^n a^^m ♦jiv:fn H»nirD n^n :»*iy n«m pip is "]tj^3;D aim n:3 iny t^^-^nn ♦o s^Vsnn ^^ n^ti^t ^in» ^D"* oyD i^bn :^mt^ nnpS ^cono 20 12. non kindness, turgeacence. T\\li^ to do. np3 to visit. IDt^ to pre- serve. 13. |S:f ^0 Zt/rf^. 3dS the heart, to viove up. and down, from 37 the same, yv to know. 14. NDn ;!o szn. IDiJ? ?o observe, to keeji. \^y iniquity, from Til;? /o pervert. npJ ^o cleanse. 15. ^^K'l ^0 ;5e. pnS ?o 5i/i(?n. nsit' a lip, to crush. 6. nJ3 in Hiph. ^o declare. nob>'n c secret, from oS;? ro conceal. DDR ro 6e ?y/se. 733 double, to double. n'B'in wisdom, reality, truth, from nL7^ ^0 fie. " Double as to, or m wisdom," Park. " On SjttASs £(rT«t vai KXTK at." Septuag. " Et quod multiplex esset lex ejus." Vulg. " Du- plo majoraesse iis quae existunt." Tremel. " Quia (meruisti) dupli- cia secundum legem." Pagnin. " Quia duplicia in essentia." Montan. j.'T to know. riB'J to be remits, to forget. T\'\}} to pervert. And know that God has been remiss (or indulgent^ to you more than your iniquity de« serves. 201 JOB XI. 1 THEN answered Zophar the Naamathite, and said, 2 Should not the multitude of words be answered? and should a man full of talk be justified? 3 Should thy lies make men hold their peace? and, when thou mockest, shall no man make thee ashamed? 4 For thou hast said. My doctrine is pure, and I am clean in thine eyes.* 5 But oh that God would speak, and open his lips against theejf 6 And that he would show thee the secrets of wisdom, that they are double to that which is! Know, therefore, that God exacteth of thee less than thine iniquity deserveth. 7 Canst thou by searching find out God? canst thou find out the Almighty unto perfection? 8 It is as high as heaven; what canst thou do? deeper than hell; what canst thou know? 9 The measure thereof is longer than the earth, and broader than the sea. 7. *lpn a searching outy to exfilore. K2fD to find out. ^''^DD perfection^ fromn'73 to finish. 8. n3J to be high, hy^ to work, devise. pD;? to be deep. VlXi? the con- cealed-filace, from hnw to ask. pT to know. 9. TMi to be long. HD to measure. 3n*l to be made broad. 10. ^T\ to pass anuay, to destroy, 1JD to shut up. '7np to gather to- gether, 'yo to turn back. 1 1 . CnD mortals, from HD to die. NIB? vanity. riNI to see. pN inigui- tyt S'''^ffi from |N to labour. jD to divide, to understand. * This charge has been supposed to be not well founded, but see ch. X. 7. t Videch. ix. 15. x. 2. 2 C 202 vy j a multitude, ?nany, from nai to inultifdy. 20. WT)} eyes, from T\^^ to affect, or reflect. J?jyi to be unjust. Th2 to fail, to finish. ^\in flight, a place of refuge, from DJ to fee away. n3N to fierish. nipn expectation, from nip to hope. n3D a puff, from naj to breathe out. K'33 breath, soul, to breathe. Their hopes a puff of air. 204 JOB XII. :D'Dn pn«; pint:^ imvn m^«S 5jnDS ninDni tDn^ti^b tD^Sns* vbti^^ ^ t<: Stety Dbi«T :iTn m^K >40n -iK-^^S 7 n»n n{y« :n^?r nnt:^y mn^ t o nW 'j:):! ^^^ 1. nJ^? fci answer. ^DN ;o sfieak. 2. DJ:3N ;n^/z/, from }DN io confirm. U'j} people, together with, no I'o Ji'e. riDDn wisdom, from D3n ?o be wise. 3. DdS ^0 be endued with understanding-. 1DD like, as, from 3 as, and ID the very, the what, from HO wAo. SdJ to fall. {'N no?, from px /a- bour, vanity. 4. pni? ?o deride, ^n a neighbour, from n>n to feed. Nip i'o ca//. nj>* ?o answer, pni* ;o be just. U"Oi\ perfect, from DH to finish. 5. TSh a lamp, or 4 and T£3 calamity, " because of affliction." f13 « reproach, an object of reproach, from ?3 ?o reproach. mniS'J,', thoughts, sfileiidors, from HE'J? ?o shine. pK'ky fAe prosperous, at rest, to be tran- quil. jN'w^ the same. JDJ prepared, from p ?o »2cX:c ready. DHJ^IO sfum- blings, from n>>?3 ?o totter. SjT the foot, to impress. 6. n7iy ;o 6(? c; quiet. briN c tabernacle, to pitch a tent. TW to de" stray utterly, a destroyer. T\r\D2 confidence, from ni33 /o trust, pi ?o 205 JOB XII. 1 AND Job answered and said, 2 No doubt but ye are the people, and wisdom shall die with you 3 But I have understanding as well as you: I am not inferior to you: yea, who knoweth not such things as these? 4 I am as one mocked of his neighbour, who calleth upon God, and he answereth him: the just upright man is laughed to scorn. 5 He that is ready to slip with his feet is as a lamp despised in the thought of him that is at ease. 6 The tabernacles of robbers prosper, and they that provoke God are secure; into whose hand Godbringeth abundantly. 7 But ask now the beasts, and they shall teach thee; and the fowls of the air, and they shall tell thee: 8 Or speak to the earth, and it shall teach thee; and the fishes of the sea shall declare unto thee. 9 Who knoweth not in all these, that the hand of the Lord hath wrought this? move^ in Hiph. (o move ivith anger. X3 to come^ or gOy in Hiph. to bring. "V the hand^ from XSy to extend. 7. dSis truly^ from dSn to firess together, bxt? to ask. niDn3, per- haps some large beast, being joined with a singular verb, or it is non^ a brute. HT to guide, teach, ^j! tojly. DJy to place. "Wl to shonv, or declare. 8. n'jy the shrub; or TV'iif to bono down, or mediiatey from WO the same, m" to teach. *13D to narrate, or tell. JT ajish, to increase, W the sea, from DH to tumultuate. 9. ^T to know. Sd all, from nbj to coinfilete. T the hand, from T\T to extend. T\0}J to do. TWn" num. !54.* * This is the only place in the dialogue between the friends and 206 ]^Sd ^r« K^n ic'^^ nts^a Sd mni ♦n ^d ts^ui ^ nvy 1^ nnujii no^n ids? :n)nn cd»d» 1"i»i is Ds^tDi D^iDi*?)^ nsty yoD *^bD> Don^i^i 20 10. K'SJ /o breathe. TtTS to live, nn s/iirit, air. la^^ Jiesh, to spread out. Ufa a marly from JJ" substance, to be. \\. \i\Athe ear, to weigh. |'Sd the Chaldee termination, the same as D"'So speeches, from So ro articulate. jn3 ro /rz/. "jH ^Ae palate. "^DK ybocf, ^0 ec?. DJ?D to taste. 12. ty"iy o/rf age, from ty z«. DDP to be wise, "pii to prolong. DV a day. njnn discernment, from p ^o distinguish. 13. D3n i*o 6e ?me. *12J to be strong. ]y to advise. \^ io distinguish. 14. Din ?o destroy. nj3 /o 6wz7rf. IJO to shut, t:;" to be. nr\3 (o open. 15. Ti;,' to restrain, non /o tximultuate. \oy to dry up. rhvJ to send forth. "jDn to overthrow. 16. \j! to be strong. TTZ^n wisdom, reality, from B?* ^o be. iiiit to err through ignorance. r\W in Hiph. to cause to err. 17. ■jS'' to go, in Hiph. ?o lead, or s^eer. |*>" ^o give counsel. SSvJ' ?o s^ri/i, or spoil, b"?!!!' Aquila a prey, Septuag. a captive, Schmidt as a Job in -which nin"' occurs, and here HiSn is found in seven of Kenni- cott's codices and in two of those of De Rossi, 'ity is used above thirty times. Vide Exod. vi. 3. 207 10 In whose hand zs the soul of every living thing, and the breath of all mankind. 1 1 Doth not the ear try words, and the mouth taste his meat? 12 With the ancient w wisdom; and in length of days understand- ing. 13 With him is wisdom and strength, he hath counsel and under- standing. 14 Behold, he breaketh down, and it cannot be built again; he shut- teth up a man, and there can be no opening. 15 Behold, he withholdeth the waters, and they dry up; also he sendeth them out, and they overturn the earth. 16 With him is strength and wisdom: the deceived and the decei- ver a7'e his. 17 He leadeth counsellors away spoiled, and maketh the judges fools. 18 He looseth the bond of kings, and girdeth their loins with a girdle. 19 He leadeth princes away spoiled, and overthroweth the mighty. 20 He removeth away the speecli of the trusty, and taketh away the understanding of the aged. fool. Tremell. Quifacit ut consulti deveniant in dernentiam. Vulgat. In stultumjinem. Montan. spoliatuvi. Das' to judge. SSn to be foolish. 18. "IDID restraint^ bond, binding ponver, from ID' to restrain. *]'7D to reign, nns to ofien^ or loose. 1DN to bind, to confine. 11IN a girdle, from "I'X to gird. D'JnD the loins. 19. ']S'' and SViJ' vide ver. 17. p3 to minister, a priest. {n\S and \i\^ strong. ^^70 to overthrow. 20. ID to turn aside.* niJty to crush, the lip, speech. jOX] faithful, from \'OVi to be steady. D|'D to taste, discernment. |pT to be old, an old man. npS to take away. 21. ']2\!/ to pour. ])^ reproach, '2 to spoil of honour. y"M free-born, noble, from 313 to offer freely . riTO a girdle, strength. p£3N to be strong. nS"* to weaken. * Having said ver. 12, « With the ancient is wisdom," &c. Job here shows that the superior wisdom of God can defeat the wise counsels of the aged, who most excel among men. 208 jjt^d'jv ni^b «vn "itt^n ♦iD tnpm n^jiD *nDi 22 >i^ innn Dym vi«n Dir ♦i!^«"i 1^ -i>dd 24 22. nSa to reveal. pDjr ?o fie deefi. «V' ?o come forth. "i^N /z^Ar, from •W tojioiu. Sy a shadow, and niD death. 23. WB^ ?o increase. "M a nation, from U a fiocfy. n2« fo destroy. r\0^ to enlarge, or ?o scatter, nr from nnJ ?o ^-ujt/e, or from HJ ro sf ;?/e in a place. 209 2 1 He poureth contempt upon princes, and weakeneth the strength of the mighty. 22 He discovereth deep things out of dai'kness, and bringcth out to light the shadow of dcatli. 23 He increaseth the nations, and destroyeth them: he enUirgeth the nations, and straiteneth them agai?i. 24 He takcth away the heart of the chief of the people of the earth, ' and causeth them to wander in a wilderness nvhere there is no way. 25 They grope in the dark without light, and he maketh them to stagger like a drunken man. 24. "ID to turn aside. 7\}!T\ to wander. )Tin without order^ a ivaste place, from nn waste.* 25. a'ti'D to feel again and again, J^D to search. n;'n to wander. I'jW to be intoxicated. * This verse presents what must have been an exact picture of the condition of those chiefs or leaders of different clans in Arabia; who, after a season of prosperity, are in their turn foiled by others, and wander dispirited, in trackless ways, to avoid their enemies. i D 210 JOB XIII. :DDD ^DJfc^ "^Di r^*? ':it* DJ »nvi» ODnnD 2 ^bn ^KD*! npt!^ ^'^tjD Dnt* cdSiki :rsn« ^ ©Dn« ipn» ♦D aiDn *pnnn SxS d« pj^tj^n 9 n»Dv HDin :u iSnnn ti^iit^n "-^nnj dk ^o tD::^iiDr ^dd^^j^ Sd^ nnsi DDnt^ ny:in 12 ^iDD iti^nnn :ddu:i nsn ♦aiiS nsK ♦Wd ^" 1. HN"! fo see. nJj? ?& reflecC. y^'i^ to hear. |IK fo weigh, p ;o discern. 3. dSx to compress. HE' ///e Bountiful. TWiD a pourer. n3' ?o mani' fist, in Hiph. ?o cause to see, to reason. 1'2n to desire. 4. SiJD to cotmect together. "ipK' /o sfieafc falsely. X31 ro /sea/, SSn naught, from ^N ?zo, to prevent. 5. |nj ^0 ^it'f. ti'^n ^0 6e silent. DDH ^o de wz«e. 6. ^^DK' to hear. nDDin proof, a reason, from HO' ?o manifest, 3T /p co7itend. TiD^f to crush, a lip. 2\ifp to hearken. 7. *13T to speak, nS;? to ascend, hence V a yoke of dominion, and Sljr and nS'i;? oppressio7i, injustice, iniquity. JT'DT deceit, from HD"! ;o rfe.- fraud. 8. D'JS/aces, from HJD ^o mrn. Ntyj ?o take or 6ear, but with D-JD-^o regard with favour. 2*1 /o contend\ 211 JOB XIII. 1 LO, mine eye hath seen all this^ mine ear hath heard and under- stood it. 2 What ye know, the saijie do I know also: I arn not inferior unto you. 3 Surely I would speak to the Almighty, and I desire to reason with God. 4 But ye are forgers of lies, ye are all physicians of no value. 5 O that you would altogether hold your peace, and it should be your wisdom! 6 Hear now my reasoning, and hearken to the pleadings of my lips. •7 Will you speak wickedly for God? and talk deceitfully for him? 8 Will ye accept his person? will ye contend for God? 9 Is it good that he should search you out? or as one man mocketh another, do ye so mock him? 10 He will surely reprove you, if ye do secretly accept persons. 1 1 Shall not his excellency make you afraid? awd his dread fall upon you? 12 Your remembrances are like unto ashes, your bodies to bodies of clay. 9. 20 to be or do good. *lpn to investigate, hr\T\ to mock, or tri/le. WMii a man, from tyJX to be infirm. 10. TO* to reprove. inD to lie hidden. NK^J vide ver. 8. 11. nxS' elevation, majestij, from NW to lift up; oxTVAil; desolation, from nKiy to confound. n;?3 to terrify, ^^i3 toftar, to tremble. Sdj to fall. 12. \y\y\ memory, from IDT to remember.* SlfO to rule, to liken, a resemblance. 1s38< ashes, from 13 to break. 21 the back. IDn mud, t<^ disturb. * " Your remembrances OD'JID? (your quoting of me7norable say' ^n't« Nj'? ^:j'7Dp» tn :^£5Dn d^^^'k ^{rfiii ^iti^n ^^ nyit^*»b '*? Kin dj :no"i« vjd S« ^Din •]« '^ 'dSd viDi^ ij7»t:^ :>iu^ f]in Vjsh >ib o i^ ^nyi* D52^D ^riD-iy f3t«n 'mn«i i^ nny ^:d nay nn^ t«<*in ♦d :p-iif« >i« o ^^ b« lnD»^{^ pn^in ♦Sj^d idd nnox n*? ^iSD 21 :'n*t^m nnn^? i« n^yt^ ojxi ^iiDi p^nyan 22 :»jvnn ^riKDm 'v^b mt' to fiass over, 14. NtyJ ^0 ^aA'e. "ii£?3 ro s/iread. \iit a toot/iy from TMli^ to renew. OB' ^o 15. '^tOp 'fo s/ay. Sn"* /o hofie. "|N j/c^ indeed., from HDJ ilo strike. pT /:o 5"0 away. 7M2 to turn. T^y to ojien one's cause. 16. u:i 7nor cover. n>niy' salvation^ from yj^' to save. ^ir\ to pollute. 17. jrOKf^o /iert7-. hSd a worrf, from So /o ^a/A-. ninx a declaration, from mn ifo sAo^y or declare. j?X C7z ear, ^o iveigh. 18. p;' /o order. aii'^Djudg7ne7it, cawse, from D2l!f to Judg'e. JJT (9 know. pIV to justify, declare just, to acquit. 19. D") ifo contend, lyin ^o Ae silent. ^'U fo exjiire. ings) are like ashes, or dirt; yo2ir bodies DD'SJ i/owr heaps, eminencies, your strongest arguments, fo /iec/zs of clay, soon washed away." J. Taylor. 213 1 3 Hold ydur peace, let me alone that I may speak, and let it come on me what will. 14 Wherefore do I take my flesh in my teeth, and put my life in mine hand? 15 Though he slay me, yet will I trust in him: but I will maintain mine own ways before him. 16 He also shall be my salvation; for an hypocrite shall not come before him. 1 7 Hear diligently my speech and my declaration with your ears. 18 Behold now, I have ordered viy cause; I know that I shall be justified. 19 Who is he that will plead with me? for now, if I hold my tongue, I shall give up the ghost. , 20 Only do not two things unto me; then will I not hide myself from thee: 21 Withdraw thine hand far from me; and let not thy dread make me afraid: 22 Then call thou, and I will answer: or let me speak, and answer thou me. 23 How many are mine iniquities and sins? make me to know my transgression and my sin. 24 Wherefore hidest thou thy face, and holdest me for thine enemy? 25 Wilt thou break a leaf driven to and fro? and wilt thou pui'sue the dry stubble? 30. D'nty tivOf from TMW to refieat. T\WV to do. n33 to turn. iriD to hide. 21. "^D the handy from HDD to bend, pm to be at a distance. riD'N t error y from D'K terrible, which may be from D' or DH to tumuUuate, n;^3 to terrify. 22. Nip to call. nJ;? to answer. IN or^ fi'om nis to choose. Xn to sfieak. y^ to render. 23. rwy to pervert. NUn to deviate. J't^S to prevaricate. J^T to know. 24. nJS to turn. inD to conceal. 3B?n to reckon. 3'N an enemy. 25. rhy a leafy to ascend. '\\l to scatter. ^'^^ to break, typ stubble^ to collect, wy to c/rj/,«\m to follow . 214 *^t:>2 tDt^m tms?i niiiy »itrmni nyiii2 ♦^v 27 :tr3? iSDfc« iJiiD nba» apiD «im :ni5nnn 28 26. 3n3 fo ronVf. 11D ?o be very bitter. Viy to inherit. 7Y\^ to pervert, "yyi to agitate, a child. 27. U\S to place. HD a clog. Sjl afoot. IDK: to keep. mN tojournetf. WW to take root, npn to imprint. 215 26 For thou writest bitter things against me, and raakest me to possess the iniquities of my youth. 27 Thou puttest my feet also in the stocks, and lookest narrowly unto all my paths; thou settest a print upon the heels of my feet. 28 And he, as a rotten thing, consumeth, as a garment that is moth-eaten. 28. 3p"l to putrefy. nSa to groiv old. HJia a cohering ^ to be deceitful. *7J3N to eat. W^ a moth^ tft^jr to consume. ^^ JOB XIV. V»V3 ♦nn V2m C3*n» "ii;p ntrtt i^S^ cd-i« i^ 2 nt '-?5r J^K ni]DV» Ni'^i SifD n'lm *7D>i «^^ 3 ^n» ♦» ^fJjiDy DStt^Di !«ib^ n^ti^ ti^^xi :t£^nn 12 SiNira ]n^ ^D tDDiK^D ny* t'n pny» m^fi "-^ii* Sdi: -in dSixi ^♦i'ly Sy i§ "nSnn n^fjS inDpnn :mn.xn t:^*^}i^ mpm n« 20 . ■— — .ii.i.. ■. i.^-. ■■--. — ■ '■ ■ '-■-— ■■ — ■- -■-■ -— — . — . — . ' — - ■ " ■■ . -. . I. . - ^ 12. aDiy to lie doivn. Dp to rise. TiSs not, from T]h2 to wear out. D'O'w^ the /leaveTis, from Dty io filace. yp" io aivake, perhaps the root is I'p fo harass. "Tl? /o rcfse «/2, or rouse. T\l\^ sleep, fi'om \l!f^ to slee/i. 13. |nj to give. '?Xi5» fo osAr. |3X fo /«'cfe. ino fo hide. 2iif to turn away. fjK heat, from nSN ^o be warm. r\lif to apfioint. pn an ordinance, a set time, ov Jilace, to define. "iDI to remember. 14. n:3 ;o die. 13 J ?o 6e str07ig, a man. HTI ?o /ix;e'. DV cfaz/. N3i* ^o 7yfl?*. IXV to wait. N2 ^o co77ze or 5-0. ^Sn ?o change, 15. xnp io ca//, nJi> ^0 answer, pwy to work. TtT to Cast out. "^DD to desire. 16. T\^ time. nj?2f to step. "130 /o number. i::)2>' to observe. 17. Dnn to seal. "("i:f ^0 dmrf up closely, a bundle, y^^ to pass, a trans- gression. S2£3 to sew up. \VJ iniquity, from TWy to pervert. 18. dSiX i/e/, from dSn ro compress, "in c jnountain, from mn^o/zro- tuberate. Ssj to fall. S^J ?o weti?' away. IX fo djnrf, a /;arrf s/owe. pnjT ^0 remove. DIpD a place, from Dp ^o stand. 219 i2 So man licth down, and riseth noi: till the heavens be no more they shall not awake, nor be raised out of their sleep. 13 Oh that thou wouldest hide me in the grave, that thou wouldest keep me secret until thy wrath be past, that thou wouldest appoint me a set time, and remember rael 14 If a man die, shall he live again? All the days of my appointed time will I wait, till my change come. 15 Thou shalt call and I will answer thee: thou wilt have a desire to the work of thine hands. 16 For now thou numberest my steps; dost thou not watch over my sin? 17 My transgression is sealed up in a bag, and thou sewest up mine iniquity, 18 And surely the mountain falling comeUi to nought, and the rock is removed out of his place. 19 The waters wear the stones; thou washest away the things which grow out of the dust of the earth; and thou destroyest the hope of man. 20 Thou prevailest for ever against him, and he passeth: thou changest his countenance, and sendeth him away. 2 1 His sons come to honour, and he knoweth it not: and they are brought low, but he perceiveth it not of them. 22 But his flesh upon him shall have pain, and his soul within him shall mourn. 19. pX a stone, from nj3 to build. 'DTW to wear. D' sea. fjtaK' to over- floiv. n'SD ivhat adheres, from HDD to unite. 13;? dust. 'J'lX the earth, from ]*'^ to ru7i, or crush, mp to stretch towards. k^'JN to be injirm. n3N to destroy. 20. f]pn to prevail. Wil beyond, continuance. -^Ti to go. T\y2f to change. t{iu) to send away. 21. n:3D to honour. nJ3 to build. ;'T to know. l>'y to be mean. {3 to divide, to understand. 22. IX yd indeed, from HDJ to strike. r^2,flesh, to spread. 3N:d (o pain. iifSi to breathe. Sdk to mourn. 220 JOB XV. nn mr D^nn nD^n ♦:iD»nn ^^^b^ ;vn 1,2 pD» rDD mm w^^ nb«i^ ^^ K^T vn«n niini onn*? onb :tDmn«D nnD ^^ -7SinnD ?»^ ^d JDDin:i nt nar 20 ne;n ^io n^tJ^ ra^^^ «^ '^'^^^'^^'^ "^"^"^^ ^^^^^ '' VT n^« cnSS «in ni) nnn ^hn Kin ^svi - npivDi n-:f ^r\nvy ^^^ dv n>a p^i ^^ 23 24 11. t3;?D .r«a//, to be diminished. niOIH^n con.o/ar.on*, from DHJ /. co7^l/•or^ n3T to sfieak. DN^ ^o «f Md. 12. npS ^0 faA-e. 3S iAe //earr. on ^o be contracted, to 'wink. 13. 3K^ ^0 remrn, aTJS^.er. xr to go out. nS ^Ae mouth. Sd ro ./zea^. 14. r^2^ to be pure. ^'^^ to justify. nV to be born. 15. 2;ip ^0 sanctify. Vide ch. v. 1. \m to be steady, in Hiph. to be- lieve. HDT to be clean. 1 6. 3;rn ^0 loathe, in Niph. /o 6e abominable. H^X in Niph. ^c be cor- rufit. r\TW to drink. nS;; to ascend, oppress. 17. nwi ;o rfectore. :i?DB^ to hear, nm ro *ee. "130 /c. r^/a^e. 18. DDH to be wise. n:3 ^o tell. nn3 ^o coTicea/. 3X ver. 10. 19 '^2hatlart,ivom'^2 alone, pj to give, n^;' ro /za«. of ^r. "IT. stranger, to be strange. 1^ the midst, from in .» bemth^n. 223 1 1 Are the consolations of God small with thee? is there any secret thing with thee? 12 Why doth thine heart carry thee away? and what do thy eyes ■wink at, 13 That thou turnest thy spirit against God, and lettestat^cA words go out of thy mouth? 14 What is man, that he should be clean? and he -which is born of a woman, that he should be righteous? 15 Behold, he putteth no trust in his saints; yea, the heavens are not clean in his sight: 1 6 How much more abominable and filthy is man, which drinketh iniquity like water? 1 7 I will show thee, hear me; and that which I have seen I will declare; 1 8 Which wise men have told from their fathers and have not hid it: 19 Unto whom alone the earth was given, and no stranger passed among them: 20 The wicked man travaileth Avith pain all his days, and the num- ber of years is hidden to the oppressor. 2 1 A dreadful sound is in his ears: in prosperity the destroyer shall come upon him. 22 He believeth not that he shall return out of darkness, and he is waited for of the sword. 20. yiify to be unjust. SSn in Hithp. to torment oneself. 13D to num' ber. rWH to reiieat. |3X to hide. \'\^ to agitate. 21. nns to shake, to fear. |TS toiveigh, an ear. T\W to break in /lieces. X3 to come. 22. |DX in Hiph. to believe. 2ty to return. 13V one watched for, from nax to watch, ain to destroy. 23. ^^3 to wander. DflS to eat. H'X where, from 'X a settlement, p to pre/tare. T\T to cast forth. 24. T\yi1 to terrify, "yi to enclose. "iSt to press down, ^T\to fircvail. ^n;? to prepare. *11TD an attack. 224 oyn nKi^:i rb« vn» najn* nt^♦ S«i n» 26 i^^n Dip* ^6) ntry* k'? :cd>'7jS nnynn -itt^6« 29 -jfcyn »3D mo* NJ*? :D^:ia v"^^<^ njD* r^^^i so non ifl:in ddh* :ni:y'n r^*? insDi xb^n 33 u^xi moSj f]jn my o :in^;:j n*D "j^t:^n 34 d:d:i"i p« nSn 'jDy nnn nniy ^'^nx h^dn ss **nnit2 tori 25. riDJ to stretch out. mU' to /lour, or sAed. *>3J ?o Ae strong. 26. yi «o rwn. nNIX /Ae necA'. ''2}f thickrieas, from 712;; ^o be thick. W2^ bosses, ft'om 21 a protuberance. \10 a shield, from jJ to firotect. 27. nDD ?o cox'tr. 3'7nycr. r\'yiifat, ^703 /Ae /o/ns, strength, stujiidity. 28. pB^ ^0 inhabit. D'V c n7j/, from "U' 'o s/zr ufi. ~\TO to conceal, aty* to inhabit, in;,' in Hith, to be ready, hi a heap, to roll together. 29. T^;^ to be rich. Dp to stand, hxv to abide, hence S'n strength, sub- stance. X\01 to stretch out. hl^ Jierfection, from vhl to complete. 30. ID to depart. pV to suck, t'2' to dry tip. nsnSjy a dissolving Jlame, from h'\0 to dissolve, and ^nS ajiame. 31 . ViW vanity. r\yn to err. niion exchange, from 'ID"' to change, 32. J<"7D tofuljiL n3D /o 6enrf. p>n to flourish. 33. DDH ^0 ca«? aivay. |3J c x'iVze, from ^jiJ to strike. 1D3 a« unripe grape. "pW to cast away, n't the olive tree, from T? brightness. TVil to shoot forth. 225 23 He wandereth abroad for bread, sayings Where ia it? he know- eth that the day of darkness is ready at his hand. 24 Trouble and anguish shall make him afraid; they shall prevail against him as a king ready to the battle. 25 For he stretcheth out his hand against God, and strengtheneth himself against the Almighty. 26 He runnetii upon him, even on his neck, upon the thick bosses of his bucklers; 27 Because he covereth his face \vith his fatness, and maketh col- lops of fat on his flanks. 28 And he dwelleth in desolate cities, and in houses which no man inhabiteth, which are ready to become heaps. 29 He shall not be rich, neither shall his substance continue, nei- ther shall he prolong the perfection thereof upon the earth. 30 He shall not depart out of darkness; the flame shall dry up his branches, and by the breath of his mouth shall he go away. 3 1 Let not him that is deceived trust in vanity: for vanity shall be his recompense. 32 It shall be accomplished before his time, and his branch shall not be green. 33 He shall shake off his unripe grape as the vine, and shall cast off his flower as the olive. 34 For the congregation of hypocrites shall be desolate, and fire shall consume the tabernacles of bribery. 35 They conceive mischief, and bring forth vanity, and their belly prepareth deceit. 34. Tny an assembly^ from "^T ^o apfwint^ or convene. ^3n to be de- filed. niD^a solitary, from dSj to ivrafi together, or from Si a round mass, and HDj? to subsist; it also signifies a rock, which is a sense of the word in Arabic, \ifii fire. Sdn to eat, SriN to pitch a tent. "WW to bribe. 35. mn to conceive. Sd;? to toil. nS"" to bear. jIN vanity, from {N la- bour. p3 the belly, p to prepare. XXTTsXi fraud, from nm to project, te cheat. 2F 226 JOB XVI. ^fimD n]2i nbiiD ♦nj^au^ t^iDt^n iv« tv^i ^' 2 t5^> 1^ n-init^ ODD >3:iH d:i :n:ivn o* o^oa DD»Vy m^nnfc* ♦t^ui nnn CDDtt^ui ♦5 ion DD^D«« i^K^t^n ion CDD^Sy nvoi^i 5 moK^n ♦i^'^n nny ']^ nSn» ♦^d no nS-in«i r ♦trnD u Dpn n\-i ivb ^:jDDpm t^my Sd s S« S« o-i'jiD^ :piinp iti^nSi CDV -ii^b O'n^t? >5np^i tltt»nn 5 nDKn nn« cdv npa ♦nn nny »nn nb»S ^ t^n Si:i^i y»pnn njc o»^'7^e tryn jo^dS a^D ^ nts^^? c^Dn ]Ui y^pnS nnriD ntrw D'dh 3?»pn'7 tD^nbii >inpn :p ♦n^i v^"^*' ^^^ ^ nDi^n ^iu^ CDV np:i ^nn nny ^nn D^Diy 9^ DipD S5< D'Dti^n nnriD tD^on np* tD^n^K tD^nb« ?^pi Form L9-50m-9,'60(B3610&4)444 IJl suu!iiiH'iHi^i'''i'.i '";Ii::li;;,,i,\n;i]iii AA 000 606 439 8 r':^m^